S3C831B

21-S3-C831B/P831B-062003 USER'S MANUAL www.DataSheet4U.com S3C831B/P831B 8-Bit CMOS Microcontroller Revision 1 S3C831B/P831B PRODUCT OVERVIEW 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW S3C8-SERIES MICROCONTROLLERS Samsung's S3C8 series of 8-bit single-chip CMOS microcontrollers offers a fast and efficient CPU, a wide range of integrated peripherals, and various mask-programmable ROM sizes. Among the major CPU features are: — Efficient register-oriented architecture — Selectable CPU clock sources — Idle and Stop power-down mode release by interrupt — Built-in basic timer with watchdog function A sophisticated interrupt structure recognizes up to eight interrupt levels. Each level can have one or more interrupt sources and vectors. Fast interrupt processing (within a minimum of four CPU clocks) can be assigned to specific interrupt levels. S3C831B MICROCONTROLLER www.DataSheet4U.com The S3C831B single-chip microcontroller are fabricated using the highly advanced CMOS process. Its design is based on the powerful SAM88RC CPU core. Stop and idle (power-down) modes were implemented to reduce power consumption. The S3C831B is a microcontroller with a 64K-byte mask-programmable ROM embedded. The S3P831B is a microcontroller with a 64K-byte one-time-programmable ROM embedded. Using the SAM88RC modular design approach, the following peripherals were integrated with the SAM88RC CPU core: — Large number of programable I/O ports (Total 72 pins) — PLL frequency synthesizer — 16-bits intermediate frequency counter — Two synchronous SIO modules — Two 8-bit timer/counters — One 16-bit timer/counter — Low voltage reset — A/D converter with 8 selectable input pins OTP The S3C831B microcontroller is also available in OTP (One Time Programmable) version, S3P831B. The S3P831B microcontroller has an on-chip 64K-byte one-time-programmable EPROM instead of masked ROM. The S3P831B is comparable to S3C831B, both in function and in pin configuration. 1-1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW S3C831B/P831B FEATURES CPU • SAM88RC CPU core Two 8-bit Serial I/O Interface • • • 8-bit transmit/receive mode 8-bit receive mode Selectable baud rate or external clock source Memory • • 2576-byte internal register file (including LCD display RAM) 64K-byte internal program memory area PLL Frequency Synthesizer • VIN level: 300mVpp (minimum) • • AMVCO range: 0.5 MHz–30 MHz (3-bit counter added) FMVCO range: 30 MHz–150 MHz Instruction Set • • 78 instructions Idle and Stop instructions 72 I/O Pins • • 32 normal I/O pins 40 pins sharing with LCD segment signals 16-Bit Intermediate Frequency (IF) Counter • VIN level: 300mVPP (minimum) • • AMIF range: 100 kHz–1 MHz FMIF range: 5 MHz–15 MHz Interrupts • • 8 interrupt levels and 17 internal sources Fast interrupt processing feature LCD Controller/Driver • • • 40 segments and 4 common terminals 4/3/2 common and static selectable Internal or external resistor circuit for LCD bias 8-Bit Basic Timer • Watchdog timer function • www.DataSheet4U.com 4 kinds of clock source Timer/Counter 0 • • • Programmable 8-bit internal timer External event counter function PWM and capture function Low Voltage Reset (LVR) • • Low voltage check to make system reset VLVR: 2.4V, 3.7 V selectable Two Power-Down Modes • • Idle mode: only CPU clock stops Stop mode: system clock and CPU clock stop Timer/Counter 1 • • Programmable 8-bit interval timer External event counter function Oscillation Source • Crystal or ceramic for system clock (fx) Timer/Counter 2 • • Programmable 16-bit interval timer External event counter function Instruction Execution Time • 444 ns at 9.0 MHz (minimum) Operating Temperature Range • –25 °C to +85 °C Watch Timer • • Interval Time: 50ms, 0.5s, 1.0s at 4.5 MHz 1/1.5/3/6 kHz buzzer output selectable Operating Voltage Range • • • 2.2V to 5.5V at 0.4 MHz – 4.5 MHz 4.0 V to 5.5 V at 0.4 MHz–9.0 MHz 2.5V to 3.5V, 4.5 V to 5.5 V in PLL/IFC block Analog to Digital Converter • • 8-channel analog input 8-bit conversion resolution Package Type • 100-QFP-1420C, 100-TQFP-1414 1-2 S3C831B/P831B PRODUCT OVERVIEW BLOCK DIAGRAM P1.0-P1.7/ RESET INT0-INT7 XIN XOUT P0.2/T0CAP P0.1/T0CLK P0.3/T0OUT/T0PWM P0.4/T1CLK P0.5/T1OUT P0.6/T2CLK P0.7/T2OUT P3.1/SCK0 P3.2/SO0 P3.3/SI0 P3.4/SCK1 P3.5/SO1 P3.6/SI1 Watchdog Timer P3.0/BUZ COM0-3 P8.7-P4.0/SEG0-39 BIAS VLC0 -V LC2 VCOAM VCOFM EO0/EO1 AMIF FMIF P2.0-P2.7/AD0-AD7 CE P0.0 P0.1/T0CLK P0.2/T0CAP P0.3/T0OUT/T0PWM P0.4/T1CLK P0.5/T1OUT P0.6/T2CLK P0.7/T2OUT P1.0/INT0 P1.1/INT1 P1.2/INT2 P1.3/INT3 P1.4/INT4 P1.5/INT5 P1.6/INT6 P1.7/INT7 P2.0/AD0 P2.1/AD1 P2.2/AD2 P2.3/AD3 P2.4/AD4 P2.5/AD5 P2.6/AD6 P2.7/AD7 P3.0/BUZ P3.1/SCK0 P3.2/SO0 P3.3/SI0 P3.4/SCK1 P3.5/SO1 P3.6/SI1 P3.7 P4.0/SEG39 P4.1/SEG38 P4.2/SEG37 P4.3/SEG36 P4.4/SEG35 P4.5/SEG34 P4.6/SEG33 P4.7/SEG32 P5.0/SEG31 P5.1/SEG30 P5.2/SEG29 P5.3/SEG28 P5.4/SEG27 P5.5/SEG26 P5.6/SEG25 P5.7/SEG24 P6.0/SEG23 P6.1/SEG22 P6.2/SEG21 P6.3/SEG20 P6.4/SEG19 P6.5/SEG18 P6.6/SEG17 P6.7/SEG16 P7.0/SEG15 P7.1/SEG14 P7.2/SEG13 P7.3/SEG12 P7.4/SEG11 P7.5/SEG10 P7.6/SEG9 P7.7/SEG8 OSC 8-Bit Timer/ Counter0 8-Bit Timer/ Counter1 Port 1 16-Bit Timer/ Counter2 SIO 0 Port 2 SIO 1 Port 0 I/O Port and Interrupt Control Basic Timer Port 3 Watch Timer SAM88RC Core www.DataSheet4U.com LCD Driver/ Controller Port 4 PLL Synthesizer IF Counter Port 5 8-Bit ADC AVDD P8.0/SEG7 P8.1/SEG6 P8.2/SEG5 P8.3/SEG4 P8.4/SEG3 P8.5/SEG2 P8.6/SEG1 P8.7/SEG0 LVREN LVRSEL 64K-byte ROM 2576-byte Register File Port 6 Port 8 Port 7 Low Voltage Reset TEST1 TEST2 VDD VDDPLL0 VDDPLL1 VSS VSSPLL Figure 1-1. Block Diagram 1-3 PRODUCT OVERVIEW S3C831B/P831B PIN ASSIGNMENT FMIF VDDPLL0 EO0 EO1 CE P0.0 P0.1/T0CLK P0.2/T0CAP P0.3/T0OUT/T0PWM P0.4/T1CLK P0.5/T1OUT P0.6/T2CLK P0.7/T2OUT P1.0/INT0 P1.1/INT1 P1.2/INT2 P1.3/INT3 P1.4/INT4 P1.5/INT5 P1.6/INT6 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 www.DataSheet4U.com P1.7/INT7 P2.0/AD0 P2.1/AD1 P2.2/AD2 P2.3/AD3 P2.4/AD4 P2.5/AD5 P2.6/AD6 P2.7/AD7 AVDD P3.0/BUZ P3.1/SCK0 P3.2/SO0 P3.3/SI0 VDD VSS XOUT XIN TEST1 TEST2 P3.4/SCK1 RESET P3.5/SO1 P3.6/SI1 P3.7 P4.0/SEG39 P4.1/SEG38 P4.2/SEG37 P4.3/SEG36 P4.4/SEG35 S3C831B 100-QFP-1420C 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 AMIF VSSPLL VCOAM VCOFM VDDPLL1 LVREN LVRSEL BIAS VLC0 VLC1 VLC2 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 SEG0/P8.7 SEG1/P8.6 SEG2/P8.5 SEG3/P8.4 SEG4/P8.3 SEG5/P8.2 SEG6/P8.1 SEG7/P8.0 SEG8/P7.7 SEG9/P7.6 SEG10/P7.5 SEG11/P7.4 SEG12/P7.3 SEG13/P7.2 SEG14/P7.1 Figure 1-2. S3C831B Pin Assignments (100-QFP-1420C) 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 SEG15/P7.0 SEG16/P6.7 SEG17/P6.6 SEG18/P6.5 SEG19/P6.4 SEG20/P6.3 SEG21/P6.2 SEG22/P6.1 SEG23/P6.0 SEG24/P5.7 SEG25/P5.6 SEG26/P5.5 SEG27/P5.4 SEG28/P5.3 SEG29/P5.2 SEG30/P5.1 SEG31/P5.0 SEG32/P4.7 SEG33/P4.6 SEG34/P4.5 1-4 S3C831B/P831B PRODUCT OVERVIEW VCOAM VSSPLL AMIF FMIF VDDPLL0 EO0 EO1 CE P0.0 P0.1/T0CLK P0.2/T0CAP P0.3/T0OUT/T0PWM P0.4/T1CLK P0.5/T1OUT P0.6/T2CLK P0.7/T2OUT P1.0/INT0 P1.1/INT1 P1.2/INT2 P1.3/INT3 P1.4/INT4 P1.5/INT5 P1.6/INT6 P1.7/INT7 P2.0/AD0 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 www.DataSheet4U.com P2.1/AD1 P2.2/AD2 P2.3/AD3 P2.4/AD4 P2.5/AD5 P2.6/AD6 P2.7/AD7 AVDD P3.0/BUZ P3.1/SCK0 P3.2/SO0 P3.3/SI0 VDD VSS XOUT XIN TEST1 TEST2 P3.4/SCK1 RESET P3.5/SO1 P3.6/SI1 P3.7 P4.0/SEG39 P4.1/SEG38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 S3C831B 100-TQFP-1414 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 VCOFM VDDPLL1 LVREN LVRSEL BIAS VLC0 VLC1 VLC2 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 SEG0/P8.7 SEG1/P8.6 SEG2/P8.5 SEG3/P8.4 SEG4/P8.3 SEG5/P8.2 SEG6/P8.1 SEG7/P8.0 SEG8/P7.7 SEG9/P7.6 SEG10/P7.5 SEG11/P7.4 SEG12/P7.3 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 SEG13/P7.2 SEG14/P7.1 SEG15/P7.0 SEG16/P6.7 SEG17/P6.6 SEG18/P6.5 SEG19/P6.4 SEG20/P6.3 SEG21/P6.2 SEG22/P6.1 SEG23/P6.0 SEG24/P5.7 SEG25/P5.6 SEG26/P5.5 SEG27/P5.4 SEG28/P5.3 SEG29/P5.2 SEG30/P5.1 SEG31/P5.0 SEG32/P4.7 SEG33/P4.6 SEG34/P4.5 SEG35/P4.4 SEG36/P4.3 SEG37/P4.2 Figure 1-3. S3C831B Pin Assignments (100-TQFP-1414) 1-5 PRODUCT OVERVIEW S3C831B/P831B PIN DESCRIPTIONS Table 1-1. S3C831B Pin Descriptions Pin Names P0.0 P0.1 P0.2 P0.3 P0.4 P0.5 P0.6 P0.7 P1.0-P1.3 Pin Type I/O Pin Description I/O port with bit programmable pins; Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain output and software assignable pull-ups. Circuit Type E-4 Pin No. 86(84) 87(85) 88(86) 89(87) 90(88) 91(89) 92(90) 93(91) 94-97 (92-95) Share Pins – T0CLK T0CAP T0OUT/T0PWM T1CLK TOUT T2CLK T2OUT INT0-INT3 I/O I/O port with bit programmable pins; Schmitt trigger Input or push-pull output and software assignable pull-ups; Alternately used for external interrupt input (noise filters, interrupt enable and pending control). I/O port with bit programmable pins; Input or push-pull and software assignable pull-ups; Alternately used for external interrupt input (Noise filters, interrupt enable and pending control) I/O port with bit programmable pins; Schmitt trigger input or push-pull output and software assignable pull-ups. I/O port with bit programmable pins; Input or pushpull, open-drain output and software assignable pull-ups. D-7 P1.4-P1.7 I/O D-8 98-1 (96-99) INT4-INT7 www.DataSheet4U.com P2.0-P2.7 I/O F-16 2-9 (100-7) 11(9) 12(10) 13(11) 14(12) 21(19) 23(21) 24(22) 25(23) 26-33 (24-31) 34-41 (32-39) 42-49 (40-47) 50-57 (48-55) 58-65 (56-63) AD0-AD7 P3.0 P3.1 P3.2 P3.3 P3.4 P3.5 P3.6 P3.7 P4.0-P4.7 I/O E-2 BUZ SCK0 SO0 SI0 SCK1 SO1 SI1 – SEG39-SEG32 I/O I/O port with nibble programmable pins; Input or push-pull, open-drain output and software assignable pull-ups. Same as Port 4 I/O port with nibble programmable pins; Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain output and software assignable pull-ups. Same as Port 6 Same as Port 6 H-42 P5.0-P5.7 P6.0-P6.7 I/O I/O H-42 H-41 SEG31-SEG24 SEG23-SEG16 P7.0-P7.7 P8.0-P8.7 I/O I/O H-41 H-41 SEG15-SEG8 SEG7-SEG0 NOTE: The parentheses indicate pin number for 100-TQFP-1414 package. 1-6 S3C831B/P831B PRODUCT OVERVIEW Table 1-1. S3C831B Pin Descriptions (Continued) Pin Names COM0-COM3 SEG0-SEG23 SEG24-SEG39 BIAS VLC0 VLC1 VLC2 VDD VSS VDDPLL0-1 VSSPLL AVDD XOUT, XIN www.DataSheet4U.com Pin Type O I/O I/O I I Pin Description Common signal output for LCD display LCD segment signal output LCD segment signal output LCD power control LCD power supply Voltage dividing resistors are assignable by software Main power supply Main ground PLL/IFC power supply PLL/IFC ground A/D converter power supply Main oscillator pins for CPU oscillation Test signal input pin (Must be connected to VSS) LVR criterion voltage selection pin (Must be connected to VDD or VSS) LVR enable pin (Must be connected to VDD or VSS) System reset pin Input pin for checking device power Normal operation is high level and PLL/IFC Operation is stopped at low power PLL's phase error output0 PLL's phase error output1 External VCOAM/VCOFM signal inputs Circuit Type H H-41 H-42 – – Pin No. 69-66 (67-64) 65-42 (63-40) 41-26 (39-24) 73(71) 72-70 (70-68) 15(13) 16(14) 82, 76 (80,74) 79(77) 10(8) 17, 18 (15,16) 19, 20 (17,18) 74(72) 75(73) 22(20) 85(83) Share Pins – P8-P6 P5-P4 – – – – – – – – I I I I I – – – – – – – A A B B-5 – – – – – – – – – – – TEST1, TEST2 LVRSEL LVREN RESET CE EO0 EO1 VCOAM VCOFM O O I A-2 A-2 B-4 83(81) 84(82) 78, 77 (76,75) – – – NOTE: The parentheses indicate pin number for 100-TQFP-1414 package. 1-7 PRODUCT OVERVIEW S3C831B/P831B Table 1-1. S3C831B Pin Descriptions (Continued) Pin Names FMIF, AMIF AD0-AD7 BUZ SCK0 SO0 SI0 SCK1 SO1 SI1 T0CLK T0CAP T0OUT T0PWM www.DataSheet4U.com Pin Type I I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Pin Description FM/AM intermediate frequency signal inputs ADC input pins 1, 1.5, 3 or 6 kHz frequency output for buzzer sound at 4.5 MHz clock SIO0 interface signal SIO0 interface data output signal SIO0 interface data input signal SIO1 interface signal SIO1 interface data output signal SIO1 interface data input signal Timer 0 clock input Timer 0 capture input Timer 0 clock output Timer 0 PWM output Timer 1 clock input Timer 1 clock output Timer 2 clock input Timer 2 clock output External interrupt input pins External interrupt input pins Circuit Type B-4 F-16 E-2 E-2 E-2 E-2 E-2 E-2 E-2 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 D-7 D-8 Pin No. 81, 80 (79,78) 2-9 (100-7) 11(9) 12(10) 13(11) 14(12) 21(19) 23(21) 24(22) 87(85) 88(86) 89(87) 89(87) 90(88) 91(89) 92(90) 93(91) 94-97 (92-95) 98-1 (96-99) Share Pins – P2.0-P2.7 P3.0 P3.1 P3.2 P3.3 P3.4 P3.5 P3.6 P0.1 P0.2 P0.3 P0.3 P0.4 P0.5 P0.6 P0.7 P1.0-P1.3 P1.4-P1.7 T1CLK T1OUT T2CLK T2OUT INT0-INT3 INT4-INT7 NOTE: The parentheses indicate pin number for 100-TQFP-1414 package. 1-8 S3C831B/P831B PRODUCT OVERVIEW PIN CIRCUITS VDD In P-Channel In N-Channel N-CH Type A Feedback Enable Pull-down Enable Figure 1-4. Pin Circuit Type A Figure 1-7. Pin Circuit Type B-4 VDD Up www.DataSheet4U.com P-Channel Out In Down N-Channel Figure 1-5. Pin Circuit Type A-2 (EO) Figure 1-8. Pin Circuit Type B-5 (CE) VDD Pull-up Resistor VDD Data P-Channel Out In Schmitt Trigger Output Disable N-Channel Figure 1-6. Pin Circuit Type B (RESET) Figure 1-9. Pin Circuit Type C 1-9 PRODUCT OVERVIEW S3C831B/P831B VDD Open drain Enable Pull-up Enable Data Output Disable Circuit Type C P-Channel VDD Pull-up Resistor VDD Pull-up Enable I/O I/O Data Port Enable (PG2CON.4) Schmitt Trigger Output Disable VSS Figure 1-10. Pin Circuit Type D-7 (P1.0-P1.3) Figure 1-12. Pin Circuit Type E-2 (P3) www.DataSheet4U.com VDD VDD Open drain Enable Pull-up Resistor VDD Pull-up Enable Data Output Disable Circuit Type C P-Channel Data Pull-up Enable I/O I/O Port Enable (PG2CON.5) Output Disable VSS Figure 1-11. Pin Circuit Type D-8 (P1.4-P1.7) Figure 1-13. Pin Circuit Type E-4 (P0) 1-10 S3C831B/P831B PRODUCT OVERVIEW VDD VLC0 Pull-up Enable Data Output Disable Circuit Type C I/O VLC1 SEG ADCEN Output Disable VLC2 Out ADC Select Data To ADC Figure 1-14. Pin Circuit Type F-16 (P2) www.DataSheet4U.com Figure 1-16. Pin Circuit Type H-39 VLC0 VLC1 LCD COM Out VLC2 Figure 1-15. Pin Circuit Type H (COM0-COM3) 1-11 PRODUCT OVERVIEW S3C831B/P831B VDD Pull-up Resistor Resistor Enable P-CH I/O N-CH VDD Open Drain Data Output Disable1 SEG Output Disable2 Circuit Type H-39 Figure 1-17. Pin Circuit Type H-41 (P6-P8) www.DataSheet4U.com VDD Pull-up Resistor Resistor Enable P-CH I/O N-CH VDD Open Drain Data Output Disable1 SEG Output Disable2 Circuit Type H-39 Figure 1-18. Pin Circuit Type H-42 (P4, P5) 1-12 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESS SPACES 2 OVERVIEW ADDRESS SPACES The S3C831B microcontroller has two types of address space: — Internal program memory (ROM) — Internal register file A 16-bit address bus supports program memory operations. A separate 8-bit register bus carries addresses and data between the CPU and the register file. The S3C831B has an internal 64-Kbyte mask-programmable ROM. The 256-byte physical register space is expanded into an addressable area of 320 bytes using addressing modes. A 20-byte LCD display register file is implemented. www.DataSheet4U.com There are 2,646 mapped registers in the internal register file. Of these, 2,576 are for general-purpose. (This number includes a 16-byte working register common area used as a "scratch area" for data operations, ten 192-byte prime register areas, and ten 64-byte areas (Set 2)). Thirteen 8-bit registers are used for the CPU and the system control, and 57 registers are mapped for peripheral controls and data registers. Ten register locations are not mapped. 2-1 ADDRESS SPACES S3C831B/P831B PROGRAM MEMORY (ROM) Program memory (ROM) stores program codes or table data. The S3C831B has 64K bytes internal maskprogrammable program memory. The first 256 bytes of the ROM (0H–0FFH) are reserved for interrupt vector addresses. Unused locations in this address range can be used as normal program memory. If you use the vector address area to store a program code, be careful not to overwrite the vector addresses stored in these locations. The ROM address at which a program execution starts after a reset is 0100H. (Decimal) 65,535 64K-bytes Internal Program Memory Area (HEX) FFFFH 255 www.DataSheet4U.com FFH Interrupt Vector Area 0 0H Figure 2-1. Program Memory Address Space 2-2 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESS SPACES REGISTER ARCHITECTURE In the S3C831B implementation, the upper 64-byte area of register files is expanded two 64-byte areas, called set 1 and set 2. The upper 32-byte area of set 1 is further expanded two 32-byte register banks (bank 0 and bank 1), and the lower 32-byte area is a single 32-byte common area. In case of S3C831B the total number of addressable 8-bit registers is 2,646. Of these 2,646 registers, 13 bytes are for CPU and system control registers, 57 bytes are for peripheral control and data registers, 16 bytes are used as a shared working registers, and 2,560 registers are for general-purpose use, page 0-page 9 (including 20 bytes for LCD display registers). You can always address set 1 register locations, regardless of which of the ten register pages is currently selected. Set 1 locations, however, can only be addressed using register addressing modes. The extension of register space into separately addressable areas (sets, banks, and pages) is supported by various addressing mode restrictions, the select bank instructions, SB0 and SB1, and the register page pointer (PP). Specific register types and the area (in bytes) that they occupy in the register file are summarized in Table 2–1. Table 2-1. S3C831B Register Type Summary Register Type General-purpose registers (including the 16-byte common working register area, ten 192-byte prime register area (including LCD data registers), and ten 64byte set 2 area). CPU and system control registers Mapped clock, peripheral, I/O control, and data registers Total Addressable Bytes Number of Bytes 2,576 www.DataSheet4U.com 13 57 2,646 2-3 ADDRESS SPACES S3C831B/P831B FFH Set 1 FFH FFH 32 Bytes Bank 1 FFH FFH FFH Page 1 Page 0 Page 9 Bank 0 System and Peripheral Control System and Registers Peripheral Control Registers (Register Addressing Mode) Set 2 Registers (Indirect Register, Indexed Mode, and Stack Operations) 256 Bytes C0H BFH Page 0 64 Bytes E0H DFH D0H CFH System Registers (Register Addressing Mode) Working Registers (Working Register Addressing Only) C0H ~ ~ ~ Page 9 192 Bytes Prime Data Registers (All Addressing Modes) ~ ~ 13H ~ ~ www.DataSheet4U.com 20 Bytes 00H ~ Prime Data Registers (All Addressing Modes) LCD Display Register ~ 00H Figure 2-2. Internal Register File Organization 2-4 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESS SPACES REGISTER PAGE POINTER (PP) The S3C8-series architecture supports the logical expansion of the physical 256-byte internal register file (using an 8-bit data bus) into as many as 16 separately addressable register pages. Page addressing is controlled by the register page pointer (PP, DFH). In the S3C831B microcontroller, a paged register file expansion is implemented for LCD data registers, and the register page pointer must be changed to address other pages. After a reset, the page pointer's source value (lower nibble) and the destination value (upper nibble) are always "0000", automatically selecting page 0 as the source and destination page for register addressing. Register Page Pointer (PP) DFH ,Set 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Destination register page selection bits: 0000 Destination: Page 0 Source register page selection bits: 0000 Source: Page 0 NOTE: www.DataSheet4U.com A hardware reset operation writes the 4-bit destination and source values shown above to the register page pointer. These values should be modified to address other pages. Figure 2-3. Register Page Pointer (PP) F PROGRAMMING TIP — Using the Page Pointer for RAM clear (Page 0, Page 1) LD SRP LD CLR DJNZ CLR LD LD CLR DJNZ CLR PP,#00H #0C0H R0,#0FFH @R0 R0,RAMCL0 @R0 PP,#10H R0,#0FFH @R0 R0,RAMCL1 @R0 ; Destination ← 0, Source ← 0 ; Page 0 RAM clear starts RAMCL0 ; R0 = 00H ; Destination ← 1, Source ← 0 ; Page 1 RAM clear starts RAMCL1 ; R0 = 00H NOTE: You should refer to page 6-39 and use DJNZ instruction properly when DJNZ instruction is used in your program. 2-5 ADDRESS SPACES S3C831B/P831B REGISTER SET 1 The term set 1 refers to the upper 64 bytes of the register file, locations C0H–FFH. The upper 32-byte area of this 64-byte space (E0H–FFH) is expanded two 32-byte register banks, bank 0 and bank 1. The set register bank instructions, SB0 or SB1, are used to address one bank or the other. A hardware reset operation always selects bank 0 addressing. The upper two 32-byte areas (bank 0 and bank 1) of set 1 (E0H–FFH) contains 57 mapped system and peripheral control registers. The lower 32-byte area contains 16 system registers (D0H–DFH) and a 16-byte common working register area (C0H–CFH). You can use the common working register area as a “scratch” area for data operations being performed in other areas of the register file. Registers in set 1 locations are directly accessible at all times using Register addressing mode. The 16-byte working register area can only be accessed using working register addressing (For more information about working register addressing, please refer to Chapter 3, "Addressing Modes.") REGISTER SET 2 The same 64-byte physical space that is used for set 1 locations C0H–FFH is logically duplicated to add another 64 bytes of register space. This expanded area of the register file is called set 2. For the S3C831B, the set 2 address range (C0H–FFH) is accessible on pages 0-9. The logical division of set 1 and set 2 is maintained by means of addressing mode restrictions. You can use only Register addressing mode to access set 1 locations. In order to access registers in set 2, you must use Register Indirect addressing mode or Indexed addressing mode. www.DataSheet4U.com The set 2 register area of page 0 is commonly used for stack operations. 2-6 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESS SPACES PRIME REGISTER SPACE The lower 192 bytes (00H–BFH) of the S3C831B's ten 256-byte register pages is called prime register area. Prime registers can be accessed using any of the seven addressing modes (see Chapter 3, "Addressing Modes.") The prime register area on page 0 is immediately addressable following a reset. In order to address prime registers on pages 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,7,8, or 9 you must set the register page pointer (PP) to the appropriate source and destination values. FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH Set 1 Bank 0 www.DataSheet4U.com Page 9 Page 8 Page 7 Page 6 Page 5 Page 4 Page 3 FFH Bank 1 FFH FFH FCH E0H D0H C0H C0H BFH Page 2 Set 2 Page 1 Set 2 Page 0 Set C0H 2 BFH Page 0 Set 2 Page 9 13H Page 0 Prime Space LCD Data Register Area 00H CPU and system control General-purpose Peripheral and I/O LCD data register 00H Prime Space 00H Figure 2-4. Set 1, Set 2, Prime Area Register, and LCD Data Register Map 2-7 ADDRESS SPACES S3C831B/P831B WORKING REGISTERS Instructions can access specific 8-bit registers or 16-bit register pairs using either 4-bit or 8-bit address fields. When 4-bit working register addressing is used, the 256-byte register file can be seen by the programmer as one that consists of 32 8-byte register groups or "slices." Each slice comprises of eight 8-bit registers. Using the two 8-bit register pointers, RP1 and RP0, two working register slices can be selected at any one time to form a 16-byte working register block. Using the register pointers, you can move this 16-byte register block anywhere in the addressable register file, except the set 2 area. The terms slice and block are used in this manual to help you visualize the size and relative locations of selected working register spaces: — One working register slice is 8 bytes (eight 8-bit working registers, R0–R7 or R8–R15) — One working register block is 16 bytes (sixteen 8-bit working registers, R0–R15) All the registers in an 8-byte working register slice have the same binary value for their five most significant address bits. This makes it possible for each register pointer to point to one of the 24 slices in the register file. The base addresses for the two selected 8-byte register slices are contained in register pointers RP0 and RP1. After a reset, RP0 and RP1 always point to the 16-byte common area in set 1 (C0H–CFH). www.DataSheet4U.com Slice 32 11111XXX RP1 (Registers R8-R15) Each register pointer points to one 8-byte slice of the register space, selecting a total 16-byte working register block. Slice 31 FFH F8H F7H F0H Set 1 Only CFH C0H ~ 00000XXX RP0 (Registers R0-R7) Slice 2 Slice 1 ~ 10H FH 8H 7H 0H Figure 2-5. 8-Byte Working Register Areas (Slices) 2-8 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESS SPACES USING THE REGISTER POINTS Register pointers RP0 and RP1, mapped to addresses D6H and D7H in set 1, are used to select two movable 8-byte working register slices in the register file. After a reset, they point to the working register common area: RP0 points to addresses C0H–C7H, and RP1 points to addresses C8H–CFH. To change a register pointer value, you load a new value to RP0 and/or RP1 using an SRP or LD instruction. (see Figures 2-6 and 2-7). With working register addressing, you can only access those two 8-bit slices of the register file that are currently pointed to by RP0 and RP1. You cannot, however, use the register pointers to select a working register space in set 2, C0H–FFH, because these locations can be accessed only using the Indirect Register or Indexed addressing modes. The selected 16-byte working register block usually consists of two contiguous 8-byte slices. As a general programming guideline, it is recommended that RP0 point to the "lower" slice and RP1 point to the "upper" slice (see Figure 2-6). In some cases, it may be necessary to define working register areas in different (noncontiguous) areas of the register file. In Figure 2-7, RP0 points to the "upper" slice and RP1 to the "lower" slice. Because a register pointer can point to either of the two 8-byte slices in the working register block, you can flexibly define the working register area to support program requirements. F PROGRAMMING TIP — Setting the Register Pointers www.DataSheet4U.com SRP SRP1 SRP0 CLR LD #70H #48H #0A0H RP0 RP1,#0F8H ; ; ; ; ; RP0 RP0 RP0 RP0 RP0 ← ← ← ← ← 70H, RP1 ← 78H no change, RP1 ← 48H, A0H, RP1 ← no change 00H, RP1 ← no change no change, RP1 ← 0F8H Register File Contains 32 8-Byte Slices 00001XXX RP1 00000XXX RP0 8-Byte Slice 8-Byte Slice FH (R15) 8H 7H 0H (R0) 16-Byte Contiguous Working Register block Figure 2-6. Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block 2-9 ADDRESS SPACES S3C831B/P831B 8-Byte Slice F7H (R7) F0H (R0) 11110 RP0 00000 RP1 XXX Register File Contains 32 8-Byte Slices 16-Byte Contiguous working Register block 7H (R15) 0H (R0) XXX 8-Byte Slice Figure 2-7. Non-Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block F PROGRAMMING TIP — Using the RPs to Calculate the Sum of a Series of Registers Calculate the sum of registers 80H–85H using the register pointer. The register addresses from 80H through 85H contain the values 10H, 11H, 12H, 13H, 14H, and 15 H, respectively: www.DataSheet4U.com SRP0 ADD ADC ADC ADC ADC #80H R0,R1 R0,R2 R0,R3 R0,R4 R0,R5 ; ; ; ; ; ; RP0 ← 80H R0 ← R0 + R0 ← R0 + R0 ← R0 + R0 ← R0 + R0 ← R0 + R1 R2 + C R3 + C R4 + C R5 + C The sum of these six registers, 6FH, is located in the register R0 (80H). The instruction string used in this example takes 12 bytes of instruction code and its execution time is 36 cycles. If the register pointer is not used to calculate the sum of these registers, the following instruction sequence would have to be used: ADD ADC ADC ADC ADC 80H,81H 80H,82H 80H,83H 80H,84H 80H,85H ; ; ; ; ; 80H 80H 80H 80H 80H ← ← ← ← ← (80H) (80H) (80H) (80H) (80H) + + + + + (81H) (82H) (83H) (84H) (85H) + + + + C C C C Now, the sum of the six registers is also located in register 80H. However, this instruction string takes 15 bytes of instruction code rather than 12 bytes, and its execution time is 50 cycles rather than 36 cycles. 2-10 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESS SPACES REGISTER ADDRESSING The S3C8-series register architecture provides an efficient method of working register addressing that takes full advantage of shorter instruction formats to reduce execution time. With Register (R) addressing mode, in which the operand value is the content of a specific register or register pair, you can access any location in the register file except for set 2. With working register addressing, you use a register pointer to specify an 8-byte working register space in the register file and an 8-bit register within that space. Registers are addressed either as a single 8-bit register or as a paired 16-bit register space. In a 16-bit register pair, the address of the first 8-bit register is always an even number and the address of the next register is always an odd number. The most significant byte of the 16-bit data is always stored in the even-numbered register, and the least significant byte is always stored in the next (+1) odd-numbered register. Working register addressing differs from Register addressing as it uses a register pointer to identify a specific 8-byte working register space in the internal register file and a specific 8-bit register within that space. MSB Rn www.DataSheet4U.com LSB Rn+1 n = Even address Figure 2-8. 16-Bit Register Pair 2-11 ADDRESS SPACES S3C831B/P831B Special-Purpose Registers Bank 1 FFH Control Registers E0H D0H C0H BFH RP1 Register Pointers RP0 Each register pointer (RP) can independently point to one of the 24 8-byte "slices" of the register file (other than set 2). After a reset, RP0 points to locations C0H-C7H and RP1 to locations C8H-CFH (that is, to the common working register area). NOTE: In the S3C831B microcontroller, pages 0-9 are implemented. Pages 0-9 contain all of the addressable registers in the internal register file. 00H System Registers CFH Bank 0 General-Purpose Register FFH Set 2 C0H Prime Registers www.DataSheet4U.com LCD Data Registers Page 0 Register Addressing Only All Addressing Modes Page 0 Indirect Register, Indexed Addressing Modes All Addressing Modes Can be Pointed by register Pointer Can be Pointed by Register Pointer Figure 2-9. Register File Addressing 2-12 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESS SPACES COMMON WORKING REGISTER AREA (C0H–CFH) After a reset, register pointers RP0 and RP1 automatically select two 8-byte register slices in set 1, locations C0H–CFH, as the active 16-byte working register block: RP0 → C0H–C7H RP1 → C8H–CFH This 16-byte address range is called common area. That is, locations in this area can be used as working registers by operations that address any location on any page in the register file. Typically, these working registers serve as temporary buffers for data operations between different pages. FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH www.DataSheet4U.com Page 9 Page 8 Page 7 Page 6 Page 5 Page 4 Page 3 FFH Set 1 FFH FCH E0H D0H C0H C0H BFH FFH Page 2 Set 2 Page 1 Set 2 Page 0 Set C0H 2 BFH Page 0 Set 2 ~ ~ ~ ~ 13H LCD Data Registers 00H Page 9 Page 0 Prime Space ~ ~ ~ ~ Following a hardware reset, register pointers RP0 and RP1 point to the common working register area, locations C0H-CFH. ~ Prime Space ~ ~ RP0 = RP1 = 1100 1100 0000 1000 00H Figure 2-10. Common Working Register Area 2-13 ADDRESS SPACES S3C831B/P831B F PROGRAMMING TIP — Addressing the Common Working Register Area As the following examples show, you should access working registers in the common area, locations C0H–CFH, using working register addressing mode only. Examples 1. LD SRP LD 0C2H,40H #0C0H R2,40H ; Invalid addressing mode! Use working register addressing instead: ; R2 (C2H) ← the value in location 40H 2. ADD 0C3H,#45H ; Invalid addressing mode! Use working register addressing instead: SRP ADD #0C0H R3,#45H ; R3 (C3H) ← R3 + 45H 4-BIT WORKING REGISTER ADDRESSING Each register pointer defines a movable 8-byte slice of working register space. The address information stored in a register pointer serves as an addressing "window" that makes it possible for instructions to access working registers very efficiently using short 4-bit addresses. When an instruction addresses a location in the selected working register area, the address bits are concatenated in the following way to form a complete 8-bit address: — The high-order bit of the 4-bit address selects one of the register pointers ("0" selects RP0, "1" selects RP1). www.DataSheet4U.com — The five high-order bits in the register pointer select an 8-byte slice of the register space. — The three low-order bits of the 4-bit address select one of the eight registers in the slice. As shown in Figure 2-11, the result of this operation is that the five high-order bits from the register pointer are concatenated with the three low-order bits from the instruction address to form the complete address. As long as the address stored in the register pointer remains unchanged, the three bits from the address will always point to an address in the same 8-byte register slice. Figure 2-12 shows a typical example of 4-bit working register addressing. The high-order bit of the instruction "INC R6" is "0", which selects RP0. The five high-order bits stored in RP0 (01110B) are concatenated with the three low-order bits of the instruction's 4-bit address (110B) to produce the register address 76H (01110110B). 2-14 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESS SPACES RP0 RP1 Selects RP0 or RP1 Address OPCODE Register pointer provides five high-order bits 4-bit address provides three low-order bits www.DataSheet4U.com Together they create an 8-bit register address Figure 2-11. 4-Bit Working Register Addressing RP0 01110 000 RP1 01111 000 Selects RP0 01110 110 Register address (76H) R6 0110 OPCODE 1110 Instruction 'INC R6' Figure 2-12. 4-Bit Working Register Addressing Example 2-15 ADDRESS SPACES S3C831B/P831B 8-BIT WORKING REGISTER ADDRESSING You can also use 8-bit working register addressing to access registers in a selected working register area. To initiate 8-bit working register addressing, the upper four bits of the instruction address must contain the value "1100B." This 4-bit value (1100B) indicates that the remaining four bits have the same effect as 4-bit working register addressing. As shown in Figure 2-13, the lower nibble of the 8-bit address is concatenated in much the same way as for 4-bit addressing: Bit 3 selects either RP0 or RP1, which then supplies the five high-order bits of the final address; the three low-order bits of the complete address are provided by the original instruction. Figure 2-14 shows an example of 8-bit working register addressing. The four high-order bits of the instruction address (1100B) specify 8-bit working register addressing. Bit 4 ("1") selects RP1 and the five high-order bits in RP1 (10101B) become the five high-order bits of the register address. The three low-order bits of the register address (011) are provided by the three low-order bits of the 8-bit instruction address. The five address bits from RP1 and the three address bits from the instruction are concatenated to form the complete register address, 0ABH (10101011B). RP0 RP1 www.DataSheet4U.com Selects RP0 or RP1 Address These address bits indicate 8-bit working register addressing 8-bit logical address 1 1 0 0 Register pointer provides five high-order bits Three low-order bits 8-bit physical address Figure 2-13. 8-Bit Working Register Addressing 2-16 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESS SPACES RP0 01100 000 Selects RP1 RP1 10101 000 R11 1100 1 011 8-bit address form instruction 'LD R11, R2' 10101 011 Register address (0ABH) Specifies working register addressing Figure 2-14. 8-Bit Working Register Addressing Example www.DataSheet4U.com 2-17 ADDRESS SPACES S3C831B/P831B SYSTEM AND USER STACK The S3C8-series microcontrollers use the system stack for data storage, subroutine calls and returns. The PUSH and POP instructions are used to control system stack operations. The S3C831B architecture supports stack operations in the internal register file. Stack Operations Return addresses for procedure calls, interrupts, and data are stored on the stack. The contents of the PC are saved to stack by a CALL instruction and restored by the RET instruction. When an interrupt occurs, the contents of the PC and the FLAGS register are pushed to the stack. The IRET instruction then pops these values back to their original locations. The stack address value is always decreased by one before a push operation and increased by one after a pop operation. The stack pointer (SP) always points to the stack frame stored on the top of the stack, as shown in Figure 2-15. High Address PCL PCL Top of stack PCH PCH Top of stack Flags Stack contents after an interrupt Low Address www.DataSheet4U.com Stack contents after a call instruction Figure 2-15. Stack Operations User-Defined Stacks You can freely define stacks in the internal register file as data storage locations. The instructions PUSHUI, PUSHUD, POPUI, and POPUD support user-defined stack operations. Stack Pointers (SPL, SPH) Register locations D8H and D9H contain the 16-bit stack pointer (SP) that is used for system stack operations. The most significant byte of the SP address, SP15–SP8, is stored in the SPH register (D8H), and the least significant byte, SP7–SP0, is stored in the SPL register (D9H). After a reset, the SP value is undetermined. Because only internal memory space is implemented in the S3C831B, the SPL must be initialized to an 8-bit value in the range 00H–FFH. The SPH register is not needed and can be used as a general-purpose register, if necessary. When the SPL register contains the only stack pointer value (that is, when it points to a system stack in the register file), you can use the SPH register as a general-purpose data register. However, if an overflow or underflow condition occurs as a result of increasing or decreasing the stack address value in the SPL register during normal stack operations, the value in the SPL register will overflow (or underflow) to the SPH register, overwriting any other data that is currently stored there. To avoid overwriting data in the SPH register, you can initialize the SPL value to "FFH" instead of "00H". 2-18 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESS SPACES F PROGRAMMING TIP — Standard Stack Operations Using PUSH and POP The following example shows you how to perform stack operations in the internal register file using PUSH and POP instructions: LD SPL,#0FFH ; SPL ← FFH ; (Normally, the SPL is set to 0FFH by the initialization ; routine) • • • PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH • • • PP RP0 RP1 R3 ; ; ; ; Stack address 0FEH Stack address 0FDH Stack address 0FCH Stack address 0FBH ← ← ← ← PP RP0 RP1 R3 POP POP POP POP R3 RP1 RP0 PP ; ; ; ; R3 ← Stack address 0FBH RP1 ← Stack address 0FCH RP0 ← Stack address 0FDH PP ← Stack address 0FEH www.DataSheet4U.com 2-19 ADDRESS SPACES S3C831B/P831B NOTES www.DataSheet4U.com 2-20 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESSING MODES 3 OVERVIEW ADDRESSING MODES Instructions that are stored in program memory are fetched for execution using the program counter. Instructions indicate the operation to be performed and the data to be operated on. Addressing mode is the method used to determine the location of the data operand. The operands specified in SAM88RC instructions may be condition codes, immediate data, or a location in the register file, program memory, or data memory. The S3C8-series instruction set supports seven explicit addressing modes. Not all of these addressing modes are available for each instruction. The seven addressing modes and their symbols are: — Register (R) — Indirect Register (IR) — Indexed (X) — Direct Address (DA) — Indirect Address (IA) www.DataSheet4U.com — Relative Address (RA) — Immediate (IM) 3-1 ADDRESSING MODES S3C831B/P831B REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (R) In Register addressing mode (R), the operand value is the content of a specified register or register pair (see Figure 3-1). Working register addressing differs from Register addressing in that it uses a register pointer to specify an 8-byte working register space in the register file and an 8-bit register within that space (see Figure 3-2). Program Memory 8-bit Register File Address One-Operand Instruction (Example) Register File dst OPCODE Point to One Register in Register File Value used in Instruction Execution OPERAND Sample Instruction: DEC CNTR ; Where CNTR is the label of an 8-bit register address Figure 3-1. Register Addressing www.DataSheet4U.com Register File MSB Point to RP0 or RP1 RP0 or RP1 Selected RP points to start of working register block OPERAND Program Memory 4-bit Working Register Two-Operand Instruction (Example) 3 LSBs Point to the Working Register (1 of 8) dst src OPCODE Sample Instruction: ADD R1, R2 ; Where R1 and R2 are registers in the curruntly selected working register area. Figure 3-2. Working Register Addressing 3-2 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESSING MODES INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (IR) In Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode, the content of the specified register or register pair is the address of the operand. Depending on the instruction used, the actual address may point to a register in the register file, to program memory (ROM), or to an external memory space (see Figures 3-3 through 3-6). You can use any 8-bit register to indirectly address another register. Any 16-bit register pair can be used to indirectly address another memory location. Please note, however, that you cannot access locations C0H–FFH in set 1 using the Indirect Register addressing mode. Program Memory 8-bit Register File Address One-Operand Instruction (Example) Register File dst OPCODE Point to One Register in Register File Address of Operand used by Instruction ADDRESS www.DataSheet4U.com Value used in Instruction Execution OPERAND Sample Instruction: RL @SHIFT ; Where SHIFT is the label of an 8-bit register address Figure 3-3. Indirect Register Addressing to Register File 3-3 ADDRESSING MODES S3C831B/P831B INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (Continued) Register File Program Memory Example Instruction References Program Memory REGISTER PAIR Points to Register Pair 16-Bit Address Points to Program Memory dst OPCODE Program Memory Sample Instructions: www.DataSheet4U.com CALL JP @RR2 @RR2 Value used in Instruction OPERAND Figure 3-4. Indirect Register Addressing to Program Memory 3-4 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESSING MODES INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (Continued) Register File MSB Points to RP0 or RP1 RP0 or RP1 Selected RP points to start fo working register block Program Memory 4-bit Working Register Address 3 LSBs Point to the Working Register (1 of 8) ~ ~ dst src OPCODE ADDRESS ~ Sample Instruction: OR www.DataSheet4U.com ~ OPERAND R3, @R6 Value used in Instruction Figure 3-5. Indirect Working Register Addressing to Register File 3-5 ADDRESSING MODES S3C831B/P831B INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (Concluded) Register File MSB Points to RP0 or RP1 RP0 or RP1 Selected RP points to start of working register block Next 2-bit Point to Working Register Pair (1 of 4) LSB Selects Register Pair 16-Bit address points to program memory or data memory Program Memory 4-bit Working Register Address dst src OPCODE Example Instruction References either Program Memory or Data Memory Program Memory or Data Memory Value used in Instruction www.DataSheet4U.com OPERAND Sample Instructions: LDC LDE LDE R5,@RR6 R3,@RR14 @RR4, R8 ; Program memory access ; External data memory access ; External data memory access Figure 3-6. Indirect Working Register Addressing to Program or Data Memory 3-6 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESSING MODES INDEXED ADDRESSING MODE (X) Indexed (X) addressing mode adds an offset value to a base address during instruction execution in order to calculate the effective operand address (see Figure 3-7). You can use Indexed addressing mode to access locations in the internal register file or in external memory. Please note, however, that you cannot access locations C0H–FFH in set 1 using Indexed addressing mode. In short offset Indexed addressing mode, the 8-bit displacement is treated as a signed integer in the range –128 to +127. This applies to external memory accesses only (see Figure 3-8.) For register file addressing, an 8-bit base address provided by the instruction is added to an 8-bit offset contained in a working register. For external memory accesses, the base address is stored in the working register pair designated in the instruction. The 8-bit or 16-bit offset given in the instruction is then added to that base address (see Figure 3-9). The only instruction that supports Indexed addressing mode for the internal register file is the Load instruction (LD). The LDC and LDE instructions support Indexed addressing mode for internal program memory and for external data memory, when implemented. Register File www.DataSheet4U.com RP0 or RP1 ~ Value used in Instruction OPERAND ~ Selected RP points to start of working register block + Program Memory Two-Operand Instruction Example Base Address dst/src x OPCODE 3 LSBs Point to One of the Woking Register (1 of 8) ~ INDEX ~ Sample Instruction: LD R0, #BASE[R1] ; Where BASE is an 8-bit immediate value Figure 3-7. Indexed Addressing to Register File 3-7 ADDRESSING MODES S3C831B/P831B INDEXED ADDRESSING MODE (Continued) Register File MSB Points to RP0 or RP1 RP0 or RP1 Selected RP points to start of working register block ~ Program Memory 4-bit Working Register Address OFFSET dst/src x OPCODE NEXT 2 Bits Point to Working Register Pair (1 of 4) Register Pair ~ LSB Selects www.DataSheet4U.com + 8-Bits 16-Bits Program Memory or Data Memory 16-Bit address added to offset 16-Bits Sample Instructions: LDC LDE R4, #04H[RR2] R4,#04H[RR2] OPERAND Value used in Instruction ; The values in the program address (RR2 + 04H) are loaded into register R4. ; Identical operation to LDC example, except that external program memory is accessed. Figure 3-8. Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory with Short Offset 3-8 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESSING MODES INDEXED ADDRESSING MODE (Concluded) Register File MSB Points to RP0 or RP1 RP0 or RP1 Selected RP points to start of working register block Program Memory OFFSET OFFSET dst/src src OPCODE ~ NEXT 2 Bits Point to Working Register Pair Register Pair ~ 4-bit Working Register Address LSB Selects www.DataSheet4U.com + 8-Bits 16-Bits Program Memory or Data Memory 16-Bit address added to offset 16-Bits Sample Instructions: LDC LDE R4, #1000H[RR2] R4,#1000H[RR2] OPERAND Value used in Instruction ; The values in the program address (RR2 + 1000H) are loaded into register R4. ; Identical operation to LDC example, except that external program memory is accessed. Figure 3-9. Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory 3-9 ADDRESSING MODES S3C831B/P831B DIRECT ADDRESS MODE (DA) In Direct Address (DA) mode, the instruction provides the operand's 16-bit memory address. Jump (JP) and Call (CALL) instructions use this addressing mode to specify the 16-bit destination address that is loaded into the PC whenever a JP or CALL instruction is executed. The LDC and LDE instructions can use Direct Address mode to specify the source or destination address for Load operations to program memory (LDC) or to external data memory (LDE), if implemented. Program or Data Memory Program Memory Memory Address Used www.DataSheet4U.com Upper Address Byte Lower Address Byte dst/src "0" or "1" OPCODE LSB Selects Program Memory or Data Memory: "0" = Program Memory "1" = Data Memory Sample Instructions: LDC LDE R5,1234H R5,1234H ; ; The values in the program address (1234H) are loaded into register R5. Identical operation to LDC example, except that external program memory is accessed. Figure 3-10. Direct Addressing for Load Instructions 3-10 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESSING MODES DIRECT ADDRESS MODE (Continued) Program Memory Next OPCODE Memory Address Used Upper Address Byte Lower Address Byte OPCODE Sample Instructions: JP CALL www.DataSheet4U.com C,JOB1 DISPLAY ; ; Where JOB1 is a 16-bit immediate address Where DISPLAY is a 16-bit immediate address Figure 3-11. Direct Addressing for Call and Jump Instructions 3-11 ADDRESSING MODES S3C831B/P831B INDIRECT ADDRESS MODE (IA) In Indirect Address (IA) mode, the instruction specifies an address located in the lowest 256 bytes of the program memory. The selected pair of memory locations contains the actual address of the next instruction to be executed. Only the CALL instruction can use the Indirect Address mode. Because the Indirect Address mode assumes that the operand is located in the lowest 256 bytes of program memory, only an 8-bit address is supplied in the instruction; the upper bytes of the destination address are assumed to be all zeros. Program Memory Next Instruction LSB Must be Zero Current Instruction www.DataSheet4U.com dst OPCODE Lower Address Byte Upper Address Byte Program Memory Locations 0-255 Sample Instruction: CALL #40H ; The 16-bit value in program memory addresses 40H and 41H is the subroutine start address. Figure 3-12. Indirect Addressing 3-12 S3C831B/P831B ADDRESSING MODES RELATIVE ADDRESS MODE (RA) In Relative Address (RA) mode, a twos-complement signed displacement between – 128 and + 127 is specified in the instruction. The displacement value is then added to the current PC value. The result is the address of the next instruction to be executed. Before this addition occurs, the PC contains the address of the instruction immediately following the current instruction. Several program control instructions use the Relative Address mode to perform conditional jumps. The instructions that support RA addressing are BTJRF, BTJRT, DJNZ, CPIJE, CPIJNE, and JR. Program Memory Next OPCODE Program Memory Address Used www.DataSheet4U.com Current Instruction Displacement OPCODE Current PC Value Signed Displacement Value + Sample Instructions: JR ULT,$+OFFSET ; Where OFFSET is a value in the range +127 to -128 Figure 3-13. Relative Addressing 3-13 ADDRESSING MODES S3C831B/P831B IMMEDIATE MODE (IM) In Immediate (IM) addressing mode, the operand value used in the instruction is the value supplied in the operand field itself. The operand may be one byte or one word in length, depending on the instruction used. Immediate addressing mode is useful for loading constant values into registers. Program Memory OPERAND OPCODE (The Operand value is in the instruction) Sample Instruction: LD R0,#0AAH Figure 3-14. Immediate Addressing www.DataSheet4U.com 3-14 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER 4 OVERVIEW CONTROL REGISTERS In this chapter, detailed descriptions of the S3C831B control registers are presented in an easy-to-read format. You can use this chapter as a quick-reference source when writing application programs. Figure 4-1 illustrates the important features of the standard register description format. Control register descriptions are arranged in alphabetical order according to register mnemonic. More detailed information about control registers is presented in the context of the specific peripheral hardware descriptions in Part II of this manual. Data and counter registers are not described in detail in this reference chapter. More information about all of the registers used by a specific peripheral is presented in the corresponding peripheral descriptions in Part II of this manual. The locations and read/write characteristics of all mapped registers in the S3C831B register file are listed in Table 4-1. The hardware reset value for each mapped register is described in Chapter 8, “RESET and PowerDown." www.DataSheet4U.com Table 4-1. Set 1 Registers Register Name Mnemonic Address Decimal Basic timer control register System clock control register System flags register Register pointer 0 Register pointer 1 Stack pointer (high byte) Stack pointer (low byte) Instruction pointer (high byte) Instruction pointer (low byte) Interrupt request register Interrupt mask register System mode register Register page pointer BTCON CLKCON FLAGS RP0 RP1 SPH SPL IPH IPL IRQ IMR SYM PP 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 Hex D3H D4H D5H D6H D7H D8H D9H DAH DBH DCH DDH DEH DFH R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 0 0 x 1 1 x x x x 0 x 0 0 RESET Values (bit) 6 0 – x 1 1 x x x x 0 x – 0 5 0 – x 0 0 x x x x 0 x – 0 4 0 0 x 0 0 x x x x 0 x x 0 3 0 0 x 0 1 x x x x 0 x x 0 2 0 – x – – x x x x 0 x x 0 1 0 – 0 – – x x x x 0 x 0 0 0 0 – 0 – – x x x x 0 x 0 0 Locations D0H-D2H are not mapped. 4-1 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B Table 4-2. Set 1, Bank 0 Registers Register Name Mnemonic Address Decimal Timer 0 counter register Timer 0 data register Timer 0 control register Timer 1 counter register Timer 1 data register Timer 1 control register Interrupt pending register Watch timer control register SIO 0 control register SIO 0 data register SIO 0 prescaler register SIO 1 control register SIO 1 data register SIO 1 prescaler register A/D converter control register www.DataSheet4U.com R/W 7 R R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W (note) (note) RESET Values (bit) 6 0 1 0 0 1 0 – 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x – 0 – 0 0 x x 5 0 1 0 0 1 0 – 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x – 0 – 0 0 x x 4 0 1 0 0 1 0 – 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x – 0 0 0 0 x x 3 0 1 0 0 1 0 – 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 x x 2 0 1 0 0 1 0 – 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 x x 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 x x 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 x x 0 1 0 0 1 0 – – 0 0 0 0 0 0 – x 0 0 0 0 0 x x Hex E0H E1H E2H E3H E4H E5H E6H E8H E9H EAH EBH ECH EDH EEH EFH F0H F1H F2H F3H F4H F5H F6H F7H F8H F9H FBH FDH FFH T0CNT T0DATA T0CON T1CNT T1DATA T1CON INTPND WTCON SIO0CON SIO0DATA SIO0PS SIO1CON SIO1DATA SIO1PS ADCON ADDATA LCON LMOD IFMOD IFCNT1 IFCNT0 PLLD1 PLLD0 PLLMOD PLLREF STPCON BTCNT IPR 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 251 253 255 Location E7H is not mapped. A/D converter data register LCD control register LCD mode register IF counter mode register IF counter 1 IF counter 0 PLL data register 1 PLL data register 0 PLL mode register PLL reference frequency register STOP control register Basic timer counter Interrupt priority register (note) (note) Location FAH is not mapped. R/W R/W R/W 0 0 x 0 0 x 0 0 x 0 0 x 0 0 x 0 0 x 0 0 x 0 0 x Location FCH is not mapped. Location FEH is not mapped. NOTE: Refer to the corresponding register in this chapter. 4-2 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER Table 4-3. Set 1, Bank 1 Registers Register Name Mnemonic Address Decimal Port 0 control register (high byte) Port 0 control register (low byte) Port 0 pull-up resistors enable register Port 1 control register (high byte) Port 1 control register (low byte) Port 1 interrupt control register Port 1 interrupt pending register Port 2 control register (high byte) Port 2 control register (low byte) Port 3 control register (high byte) Port 3 control register (low byte) Port 3 pull-up resistors enable register Port group 0 control register www.DataSheet4U.com R/W 7 R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 RESET Values (bit) 6 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Hex E0H E1H E2H P0CONH P0CONL P0PUR 224 225 226 Location E3H is not mapped. P1CONH P1CONL P1INT P1PND P2CONH P2CONL P3CONH P3CONL P3PUR PG0CON PG1CON PG2CON P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 T2CNTH T2CNTL T2DATAH T2DATAL T2CON 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 250 251 252 253 254 E4H E5H E6H E7H E8H E9H EAH EBH ECH EDH EEH EFH F0H F1H F2H F3H F4H F5H F6H F7H F8H FAH FBH FCH FDH FEH R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 Port group 1 control register Port group 2 control register Port 0 data register Port 1 data register Port 2 data register Port 3 data register Port 4 data register Port 5 data register Port 6 data register Port 7 data register Port 8 data register Timer 2 counter (high byte) Timer 2 counter (low byte) Timer 2 data register (high byte) Timer 2 data register (low byte) Timer 2 control register Location F9H is not mapped. Location FFH is not mapped. 4-3 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B Bit number(s) that is/are appended to the register name for bit addressing Register ID Register name Name of individual bit or related bits Register address (hexadecimal) Register location in the internal register file FLAGS − System Flags Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Bit Addressing Mode .7 Carry Flag (C) 0 0 .6 www.DataSheet4U.com D5H .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W .2 x R/W .1 x R/W Set 1 .0 0 R/W .7 x R/W .6 x R/W Register addressing mode only Operation does not generate a carry or borrow condition Operation generates carry-out or borrow into high-order bit 7 Zero Flag (Z) 0 0 Operation result is a non-zero value Operation result is zero .5 Sign Flag (S) 0 0 Operation generates positive number (MSB = "0") Operation generates negative number (MSB = "1") R = Read-only W = Write-only R/W = Read/write '-' = Not used Type of addressing that must be used to address the bit (1-bit, 4-bit, or 8-bit) Description of the effect of specific bit settings Bit number: MSB = Bit 7 LSB = Bit 0 RESET value notation: '-' = Not used 'x' = Undetermined value '0' = Logic zero '1' = Logic one Figure 4-1. Register Description Format 4-4 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER ADCON — A/D Converter Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .6–.4 .7 – – .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R EFH .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 0 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only Not used for the S3C831B A/D Input Pin Selection Bits 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 AD0 (P2.0) AD1 (P2.1) AD2 (P2.2) AD3 (P2.3) AD4 (P2.4) AD5 (P2.5) AD6 (P2.6) AD7 (P2.7) www.DataSheet4U.com .3 End-of-Conversion Bit (read-only) 0 1 Conversion not complete Conversion complete .2–.1 Clock Source Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 fxx/16 fxx/8 fxx/4 fxx .0 Start or Enable Bit 0 1 Disable operation Start operation (automatically disable operation after conversion complete). 4-5 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B BTCON — Basic Timer Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.4 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W D3H .2 0 R/W .1 0 R/W Set 1 .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only Watchdog Timer Function Disable Code (for System Reset) 1 0 1 0 Disable watchdog timer function Enable watchdog timer function Others .3–.2 Basic Timer Input Clock Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 fxx/4096 (3) fxx/1024 fxx/128 fxx/16 .1 www.DataSheet4U.com Basic Timer Counter Clear Bit (1) 0 1 No effect Clear the basic timer counter value .0 Clock Frequency Divider Clear Bit for all timers (2) 0 1 No effect Clear both clock frequency dividers NOTES: 1. When you write a “1” to BTCON.1, the basic timer counter value is cleared to “00H”. Immediately following the write operation, the BTCON.1 value is automatically cleared to “0”. 2. When you write a “1” to BTCON.0, the corresponding frequency divider is cleared to “00H”. Immediately following the write operation, the BTCON.0 value is automatically cleared to “0”. 3. The fxx is selected clock for system (main OSC. only for S3C831B). 4-6 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER CLKCON — System Clock Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 – – .5 – – .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W D4H .2 – – .1 – – Set 1 .0 – – Register addressing mode only Oscillator IRQ Wake-up Function Bit 0 1 Enable IRQ for main wake-up in power down mode Disable IRQ for main wake-up in power down mode .6–.5 .4–.3 Not used for the S3C831B CPU Clock (System Clock) Selection Bits (note) 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 fxx/16 fxx/8 fxx/2 fxx www.DataSheet4U.com .2–.0 Not used for the S3C831B NOTE: After a reset, the slowest clock (divided by 16) is selected as the system clock. To select faster clock speeds, load the appropriate values to CLKCON.3 and CLKCON.4. 4-7 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B FLAGS — System Flags Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 x R/W .6 x R/W .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W D5H .2 x R/W .1 0 R Set 1 .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only Carry Flag (C) 0 1 Operation does not generate a carry or borrow condition Operation generates a carry-out or borrow into high-order bit 7 .6 Zero Flag (Z) 0 1 Operation result is a non-zero value Operation result is zero .5 Sign Flag (S) 0 1 Operation generates a positive number (MSB = "0") Operation generates a negative number (MSB = "1") www.DataSheet4U.com .4 Overflow Flag (V) 0 1 Operation result is ≤ +127 or ≥ –128 Operation result is > +127 or < –128 .3 Decimal Adjust Flag (D) 0 1 Add operation completed Subtraction operation completed .2 Half-Carry Flag (H) 0 1 No carry-out of bit 3 or no borrow into bit 3 by addition or subtraction Addition generated carry-out of bit 3 or subtraction generated borrow into bit 3 .1 Fast Interrupt Status Flag (FIS) 0 1 Interrupt return (IRET) in progress (when read) Fast interrupt service routine in progress (when read) .0 Bank Address Selection Flag (BA) 0 1 Bank 0 is selected Bank 1 is selected 4-8 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER IFMOD — IF Counter Mode Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 – – .5 – – .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W F3H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 0 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only System Clock Control Bit for PLL Frequency Synthesizer, IF Counter, Watch Timer 0 1 The supplied clocks are not divided The supplied clocks are divided by 2. .6–.5 .4 Not used for the S3C831B Select the PLL/IFC Operation Voltage 0 1 Select the PLL/IFC operation voltage as 4.5V to 5.5V. Select the PLL/IFC operation voltage as 2.5V to 3.5V. .3–.2 www.DataSheet4U.com Interrupt Sampling Clock Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 IFC is disabled; FMIF/AMIF are pulled down and FMIF/AMIF's feed-back resistor are off. Enable IFC operation; AMIF pin is selected; FMIF is pulled down and FMIF's feed-back resistor is off. Enable IFC operation; FMIF pin is selected; AMIF is pulled down and AMIF's feed-back resistor is off. Enable IFC operation; Both AMIF and FMIF are selected. .1–.0 Gate Time Selection Bits (fxx = 4.5 MHz) (note) 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Gate opens in 2-millisecond intervals Gate opens in 8-millisecond intervals Gate opens in 16-millisecond intervals Gate remains open continuously NOTE: If the main clock is 9MHz, IFMOD.7 should be set to "1". 4-9 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B IMR — Interrupt Mask Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 x R/W .6 x R/W .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W DDH .2 x R/W .1 x R/W Set 1 .0 x R/W Register addressing mode only Interrupt Level 7 (IRQ7) Enable Bit; IF Interrupt 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask) .6 Interrupt Level 6 (IRQ6) Enable Bit; CE Interrupt 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask) .5 Interrupt Level 5 (IRQ5) Enable Bit; P1.4-P1.7 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask) www.DataSheet4U.com .4 Interrupt Level 4 (IRQ4) Enable Bit; P1.0-P1.3 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask) .3 Interrupt Level 3 (IRQ3) Enable Bit; Watch Timer 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask) .2 Interrupt Level 2 (IRQ2) Enable Bit; SIO 0, SIO 1 Interrupt 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask) .1 Interrupt Level 1 (IRQ1) Enable Bit; Timer 1, Timer 2 Interrupt 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask) .0 Interrupt Level 0 (IRQ0) Enable Bit; Timer 0 Match/Capture or Overflow 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask) NOTE: When an interrupt level is masked, any interrupt requests that may be issued are not recognized by the CPU. 4-10 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER INTPND — Interrupt Pending Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.2 .1 .7 – – .6 – – .5 – – .4 – – .3 – – E6H .2 – – Set 1, Bank 0 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only Not used for the S3C831B Timer 0 Match/Capture Interrupt Pending Bit 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending (when read), pending bit clear (when write 0) Interrupt request is pending .0 Timer 0 Overflow Interrupt Pending Bit 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending (when read), pending bit clear (when write 0) Interrupt request is pending www.DataSheet4U.com 4-11 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B IPH — Instruction Pointer (High Byte) Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.0 .7 x R/W .6 x R/W .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W DAH .2 x R/W .1 x R/W Set 1 .0 x R/W Register addressing mode only Instruction Pointer Address (High Byte) The high-byte instruction pointer value is the upper eight bits of the 16-bit instruction pointer address (IP15–IP8). The lower byte of the IP address is located in the IPL register (DBH). IPL — Instruction Pointer (Low Byte) Bit Identifier RESET Value www.DataSheet4U.com DBH .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W .2 x R/W .1 x R/W Set 1 .0 x R/W .7 x R/W .6 x R/W Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.0 Register addressing mode only Instruction Pointer Address (Low Byte) The low-byte instruction pointer value is the lower eight bits of the 16-bit instruction pointer address (IP7–IP0). The upper byte of the IP address is located in the IPH register (DAH). 4-12 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER IPR — Interrupt Priority Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7, .4, and .1 .7 x R/W .6 x R/W .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W FFH .2 x R/W Set 1, Bank 0 .1 x R/W .0 x R/W Register addressing mode only Priority Control Bits for Interrupt Groups A, B, and C (note) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Group priority undefined B>C>A A>B>C B>A>C C>A>B C>B>A A>C>B Group priority undefined .6 www.DataSheet4U.com Interrupt Subgroup C Priority Control Bit 0 1 IRQ6 > IRQ7 IRQ7 > IRQ6 .5 Interrupt Group C Priority Control Bit 0 1 IRQ5 > (IRQ6, IRQ7) (IRQ6, IRQ7) > IRQ5 .3 Interrupt Subgroup B Priority Control Bit 0 1 IRQ3 > IRQ4 IRQ4 > IRQ3 .2 Interrupt Group B Priority Control Bit 0 1 IRQ2 > (IRQ3, IRQ4) (IRQ3, IRQ4) > IRQ2 .0 Interrupt Group A Priority Control Bit 0 1 IRQ0 > IRQ1 IRQ1 > IRQ0 NOTE: Interrupt Group A - IRQ0, IRQ1 Interrupt Group B - IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ4 Interrupt Group C - IRQ5, IRQ6, IRQ7 4-13 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B IRQ — Interrupt Request Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R .6 0 R .5 0 R .4 0 R .3 0 R DCH .2 0 R .1 0 R Set 1 .0 0 R Register addressing mode only Level 7 (IRQ7) Request Pending Bit; IF Interrupt 0 1 Not pending Pending .6 Level 6 (IRQ6) Request Pending Bit; CE Interrupt 0 1 Not pending Pending .5 Level 5 (IRQ5) Request Pending Bit; P1.4-P1.7 0 1 Not pending Pending www.DataSheet4U.com .4 Level 4 (IRQ4) Request Pending Bit; P1.0-P1.3 0 1 Not pending Pending .3 Level 3 (IRQ3) Request Pending Bit; Watch Timer 0 1 Not pending Pending .2 Level 2 (IRQ2) Request Pending Bit; SIO 0, SIO 1 Interrupt 0 1 Not pending Pending .1 Level 1 (IRQ1) Request Pending Bit; Timer 1, Timer 2 Interrupt 0 1 Not pending Pending .0 Level 0 (IRQ0) Request Pending Bit; Timer 0 Match/Capture or Overflow 0 1 Not pending Pending 4-14 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER LCON — LCD Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 – – .5 – – .4 – – .3 0 R/W F1H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 0 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only LCD Output Control Bit 0 1 LCD output is low and current to dividing resistors is cut off IF LMOD.3 = "0", LCD display is turned off IF LMOD.3 = "1", output COM and SEG signals in display mode .6–.4 .3–.0 Not used for the S3C831B. LCD Port Selection Bit 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Select LCD SEG0-39 Select LCD SEG0-35/P4.0-4.3 as I/O port Select LCD SEG0-31/P4 as I/O port Select LCD SEG0-27/P4, P5.0-5.3 as I/O port Select LCD SEG0-23/P4, P5 as I/O port Select LCD SEG0-19/P4, P5, P6.0-6.3 as I/O port Select LCD SEG0-15/P4, P5, P6 as I/O port Select LCD SEG0-11/P4, P5, P6, P7.0-7.3 as I/O port Select LCD SEG0-7/P4, P5, P6, P7 as I/O port Select LCD SEG0-3/P4, P5, P6, P7, P8.0-8.3 as I/O port All I/O port (P4-P8) www.DataSheet4U.com 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 4-15 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B LMOD — LCD Mode Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W F2H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 0 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only COM Signal Enable/Disable Bit 0 1 Enable COM signal Disable COM signal .6 LCD Voltage Dividing Resistor Control Bit 0 1 Internal voltage dividing resistors External voltage dividing resistors; internal voltage dividing resistors are off .5–.4 LCD Clock (LCDCK) Frequency Selection Bits (When fxx = 4.5MHz) 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 62.5 Hz at fxx = 4.5 MHz 125 Hz at fxx = 4.5 MHz 250 Hz at fxx = 4.5 MHz 500 Hz at fxx = 4.5 MHz If the main clock is 9MHz, IFMOD.7 should be set to "1". www.DataSheet4U.com 1 NOTE: .3–.0 Duty and Bias Selection for LCD Display 0 1 1 1 1 1 x 0 0 0 0 1 x 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 1 0 0 LCD display off (COM and SEG output low) 1/4 duty, 1/3 bias 1/3 duty, 1/3 bias 1/3 duty, 1/2 bias 1/2 duty, 1/2 bias Static 4-16 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER P0CONH — Port 0 Control Register (High Byte) Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W E0H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 1 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only P0.7/T2OUT 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (T2OUT) Output mode, push-pull .5–.4 P0.6/T2CLK 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (T2CLK) Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull www.DataSheet4U.com .3–.2 P0.5/T1OUT 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (T1OUT) Output mode, push-pull .1–.0 P0.4/T1CLK 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (T1CLK) Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull 4-17 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B P0CONL — Port 0 Control Register (Low Byte) Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W E1H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 1 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only P0.3/T0OUT/T0PWM 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (T0OUT, T0PWM) Output mode, push-pull .5–.4 P0.2/T0CAP 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (T0CAP) Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull www.DataSheet4U.com .3–.2 P0.1/T0CLK 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (T0CLK) Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull .1–.0 P0.0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull 4-18 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER P0PUR — Port 0 Pull-up Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W E2H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 1 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only P0.7 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable .6 P0.6 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable .5 P0.5 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable www.DataSheet4U.com .4 P0.4 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable .3 P0.3 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable .2 P0.2 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable .1 P0.1 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable .0 P0.0 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable 4-19 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B P1CONH — Port 1 Control Register (High Byte) Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W E4H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 1 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only P1.7/INT7 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode; pull-up; interrupt on falling edge Input mode; interrupt on rising edge Input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge Output mode, push-pull .5–.4 P1.6/INT6 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode; pull-up; interrupt on falling edge Input mode; interrupt on rising edge Input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge Output mode, push-pull www.DataSheet4U.com .3–.2 P1.5/INT5 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode; pull-up; interrupt on falling edge Input mode; interrupt on rising edge Input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge Output mode, push-pull .1–.0 P1.4/INT4 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode; pull-up; interrupt on falling edge Input mode; interrupt on rising edge Input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge Output mode, push-pull 4-20 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER P1CONL — Port 1 Control Register (Low Byte) Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W E5H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 1 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only P1.3/INT3 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode; pull-up; interrupt on falling edge Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising edge Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge Output mode, push-pull .5–.4 P1.2/INT2 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode; pull-up; interrupt on falling edge Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising edge Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge Output mode, push-pull www.DataSheet4U.com .3–.2 P1.1/INT1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode; pull-up; interrupt on falling edge Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising edge Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge Output mode, push-pull .1–.0 P1.0/INT0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode; pull-up; interrupt on falling edge Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising edge Schmitt trigger input mode; interrupt on rising or falling edge Output mode, push-pull 4-21 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B P1INT — Port 1 Interrupt Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W E6H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 1 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only P1.7 External Interrupt (INT7) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt .6 P1.6 External Interrupt (INT6) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt .5 P1.5 External Interrupt (INT5) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt www.DataSheet4U.com .4 P1.4 External Interrupt (INT4) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt .3 P1.3 External Interrupt (INT3) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt .2 P1.2 External Interrupt (INT2) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt .1 P1.1 External Interrupt (INT1) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt .0 P1.0 External Interrupt (INT0) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt 4-22 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER P1PND — Port 1 Interrupt Pending Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W E7H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 1 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only P1.7/INT7 Interrupt Pending Bit 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0 Interrupt request is pending .6 P1.6/INT6 Interrupt Pending Bit 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0 Interrupt request is pending .5 P1.5/INT5 Interrupt Pending Bit 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0 Interrupt request is pending www.DataSheet4U.com .4 P1.4/INT4 Interrupt Pending Bit 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0 Interrupt request is pending .3 P1.3/INT3 Interrupt Pending Bit 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0 Interrupt request is pending .2 P1.2/INT2 Interrupt Pending Bit 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0 Interrupt request is pending .1 P1.1/INT1 Interrupt Pending Bit 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0 Interrupt request is pending .0 P1.0/INT0 Interrupt Pending Bit 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0 Interrupt request is pending 4-23 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B P2CONH — Port 2 Control Register (High Byte) Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W E8H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 1 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only P2.7/AD7 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Alternative function (ADC mode) Output mode, push-pull .5-.4 P2.6/AD6 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Alternative function (ADC mode) Output mode, push-pull www.DataSheet4U.com .3–.2 P2.5/AD5 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Alternative function (ADC mode) Output mode, push-pull .1–.0 P2.4/AD4 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Alternative function (ADC mode) Output mode, push-pull 4-24 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER P2CONL — Port 2 Control Register (Low Byte) Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W E9H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 1 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only P2.3/AD3 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Alternative function (ADC mode) Output mode, push-pull .5–.4 P2.2/AD2 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Alternative function (ADC mode) Output mode, push-pull www.DataSheet4U.com .3–.2 P2.1/AD1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Alternative function (ADC mode) Output mode, push-pull .1–.0 P2.0/AD0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Alternative function (ADC mode) Output mode, push-pull 4-25 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B P3CONH — Port 3 Control Register (High Byte) Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W EAH .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 1 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only P3.7 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull .5–.4 P3.6/SI1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (SI1) Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull www.DataSheet4U.com .3–.2 P3.5/SO1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (SO1) Output mode, push-pull .1–.0 P3.4/SCK1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (SCK1) Output mode, pull-up Alternative function (SCK1 out) Output mode, push-pull NOTE: The SO1 and SCK1 outputs are selected as push-pull or open-drain by "PG2CON". 4-26 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER P3CONL — Port 3 Control Register (Low Byte) Bank 1 Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W .2 0 R/W EBH Set 1, .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only P3.3/SI0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (SI0) Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull .5–.4 P3.2/SO0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (SO0) Output mode, push-pull www.DataSheet4U.com .3–.2 P3.1/SCK0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (SCK0) Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (SCK0 out) Output mode, push-pull .1–.0 P3.0/BUZ 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (BUZ) Output mode, push-pull NOTE: The SO0 and SCK0 outputs are selected as push-pull or open-drain by "PG2CON". 4-27 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B P3PUR — Port 3 Pull-up Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W ECH .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 1 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only P3.7 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable .6 P3.6 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable .5 P3.5 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable www.DataSheet4U.com .4 P3.4 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable .3 P3.3 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable .2 P3.2 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable .1 P3.1 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable .0 P3.0 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable 4-28 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER PG0CON — Port Group 0 Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W EDH .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 1 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only P4.0-P4.3/SEG39-36 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode .5–.4 P4.4-P4.7/SEG35-32 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode www.DataSheet4U.com .3–.2 P5.0-P5.3/SEG31-28 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode .1–.0 P5.4-P5.7/SEG27-24 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode 4-29 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B PG1CON — Port Group 1 Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W EEH .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 1 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only P6.0-P6.3/SEG23-20 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode .5–.4 P6.4-P6.7/SEG19-16 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode www.DataSheet4U.com .3–.2 P7.0-P7.3/SEG15-12 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode .1–.0 P7.4-P7.7/SEG11-8 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode 4-30 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER PG2CON — Port Group 2 Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W EFH .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 1 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only SIO1 Output Control Bit 0 1 SO1, SCK1 output is selected as push-pull. SO1, SCK1 output is selected as open-drain. .6 SIO0 Output Control Bit 0 1 SO0, SCK0 output is selected as push-pull. SO0, SCK0 output is selected as open-drain. .5 P1.4-P1.7 Input Enable Bits 0 1 Port 1.4-1.7 input enable Port 1.4-1.7 input disable www.DataSheet4U.com .4 P1.0-P1.3 Input Enable Bits 0 1 Port 1.0-1.3 input enable Port 1.0-1.3 input disable .3–.2 P8.0-P8.3/SEG7-4 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode .1–.0 P8.4-P8.7/SEG3-0 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode 4-31 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B PLLMOD — PLL Mode Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 and .4 .7 (note) F8H .5 (note) Set 1, Bank 0 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W .6 (note) .4 (note) .3 0 R/W .2 0 R/W R/W Register addressing mode only R/W R/W R/W PLL Frequency Division Method Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Direct method for VCOAM input (0.5 to 30MHz) Enable 3-bit counter for VCOAM input (0.5 to 30MHz) Pulse swallow method for VCOAM input (0.5 to 30MHz) Pulse swallow method for VCOFM input (30 to 150MHz) .6 PLL Enable/Disable Bit 0 Disable PLL 1 Enable PLL Bit Value to be Loaded into PLLD0 Register NF bit is loaded into the LSB of swallow counter INTIF Interrupt Enable Bit 0 Disable INTIF interrupt 1 Enable INTIF interrupt INTIF Interrupt Pending Bit 0 Interrupt is not pending (when read) 0 Clear pending bit (when write) 1 Interrupt is pending (when read) INTCE Interrupt Enable Bit 0 Disable INTCE interrupt requests at the CE pin 1 Enable INTCE interrupt requests at the CE pin INTCE Interrupt Pending Bit 0 Interrupt is not pending (when read) 0 Clear pending bit (when write) 1 Interrupt is pending (when read) .5 .3 www.DataSheet4U.com .2 .1 .0 NOTE: If a system reset occurs during operation mode, the current value contained is retained. If a system reset occurs after power-on, the value is undefined. 4-32 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER PLLREF — PLL Reference Frequency Selection Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 (1) F9H .2 (1) Set 1, Bank 0 .1 (1) .6 (1) .5 (1) .4 (2) .3 (1) .0 (1) R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Register addressing mode only PLL Frequency Synthesizer Locked/Unlocked Status Flag 0 1 PLL is currently in locked state PLL is currently in unlocked state .6 CE Pin level Status Flag 0 1 CE pin is currently low level CE pin is currently high level .5 IF Counter Gate Open/Close Status Flag 0 1 Gate is currently open Gate is currently close .4 www.DataSheet4U.com Power on Flag (3) 0 1 Clear power-on flag bit (when write) Power-on occurred (when read) .3 – .0 Reference Frequency Selection Bits (When fxx= 4.5MHz) (4) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1-kHz signal 3-kHz signal 5-kHz signal 6.25-kHz signal 9-kHz signal 10-kHz signal 12.5-kHz signal 25-kHz signal 50-kHz signal 100-kHz signal NOTES: 1. If a system reset occurs during operation mode, the current value contained is retained. If a system reset occurs after power-on, the value is undefined. 2. If a system reset occurs during operation mode, the current value contained is retained. If a system reset occurs after power-on, the value is "1". 3. The POF bit is read initially to check whether or not power has been turned on. 4. If the main clock is 9MHz, IFMOD.7 should be set to "1". 4-33 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B PP — Register Page Pointer Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.4 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W DFH .2 0 R/W .1 0 R/W Set 1 .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only Destination Register Page Selection Bits 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Destination: page 0 Destination: page 1 Destination: page 2 Destination: page 3 Destination: page 4 Destination: page 5 Destination: page 6 Destination: page 7 Destination: page 8 Destination: page 9 www.DataSheet4U.com .3 – .0 Source Register Page Selection Bits 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Source: page 0 Source: page 1 Source: page 2 Source: page 3 Source: page 4 Source: page 5 Source: page 6 Source: page 7 Source: page 8 Source: page 9 NOTE: In the S3C831B microcontroller, the internal register file is configured as ten pages (Pages 0-9). The pages 0-8 are used for general purpose register file, and page 9 is used for LCD data register or general purpose registers. 4-34 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER RP0 — Register Pointer 0 Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.3 .7 1 R/W .6 1 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W D6H .2 – – .1 – – Set 1 .0 – – Register addressing only Register Pointer 0 Address Value Register pointer 0 can independently point to one of the 256-byte working register areas in the register file. Using the register pointers RP0 and RP1, you can select two 8-byte register slices at one time as active working register space. After a reset, RP0 points to address C0H in register set 1, selecting the 8-byte working register slice C0H–C7H. .2–.0 Not used for the S3C831B RP1 — Register Pointer 1 www.DataSheet4U.com D7H .6 1 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 1 R/W .2 – – .1 – – Set 1 .0 – – Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 – .3 .7 1 R/W Register addressing only Register Pointer 1 Address Value Register pointer 1 can independently point to one of the 256-byte working register areas in the register file. Using the register pointers RP0 and RP1, you can select two 8-byte register slices at one time as active working register space. After a reset, RP1 points to address C8H in register set 1, selecting the 8-byte working register slice C8H–CFH. .2 – .0 Not used for the S3C831B 4-35 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B SIO0CON — SIO 0 Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W E9H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 0 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only SIO 0 Shift Clock Selection Bit 0 1 Internal clock (P.S clock) External clock (SCK0) .6 Data Direction Control Bit 0 1 MSB-first mode LSB-first mode .5 SIO 0 Mode Selection Bit 0 1 Receive-only mode Transmit/receive mode www.DataSheet4U.com .4 Shift Clock Edge Selection Bit 0 1 Tx at falling edges, Rx at rising edges Tx at rising edges, Rx at falling edges .3 SIO 0 Counter Clear and Shift Start Bit 0 1 No action Clear 3-bit counter and start shifting .2 SIO 0 Shift Operation Enable Bit 0 1 Disable shifter and clock counter Enable shifter and clock counter .1 SIO 0 Interrupt Enable Bit 0 1 Disable SIO 0 Interrupt Enable SIO 0 Interrupt .0 SIO 0 Interrupt Pending Bit 0 0 1 No interrupt pending Clear pending condition (when write) Interrupt is pending 4-36 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER SIO1CON — SIO 1 Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W ECH .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 0 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only SIO 1 Shift Clock Selection Bit 0 1 Internal clock (P.S clock) External clock (SCK1) .6 Data Direction Control Bit 0 1 MSB-first mode LSB-first mode .5 SIO 1 Mode Selection Bit 0 1 Receive-only mode Transmit/receive mode www.DataSheet4U.com .4 Shift Clock Edge Selection Bit 0 1 Tx at falling edges, Rx at rising edges Tx at rising edges, Rx at falling edges .3 SIO 1 Counter Clear and Shift Start Bit 0 1 No action Clear 3-bit counter and start shifting .2 SIO 1 Shift Operation Enable Bit 0 1 Disable shifter and clock counter Enable shifter and clock counter .1 SIO 1 Interrupt Enable Bit 0 1 Disable SIO 1 Interrupt Enable SIO 1 Interrupt .0 SIO 1 Interrupt Pending Bit 0 0 1 No interrupt pending Clear pending condition (when write) Interrupt is pending 4-37 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B SPH — Stack Pointer (High Byte) Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.0 .7 x R/W .6 x R/W .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W D8H .2 x R/W .1 x R/W Set 1 .0 x R/W Register addressing mode only Stack Pointer Address (High Byte) The high-byte stack pointer value is the upper eight bits of the 16-bit stack pointer address (SP15–SP8). The lower byte of the stack pointer value is located in register SPL (D9H). The SP value is undefined following a reset. SPL — Stack Pointer (Low Byte) Bit Identifier RESET Value www.DataSheet4U.com D9H .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W .2 x R/W .1 x R/W Set 1 .0 x R/W .7 x R/W .6 x R/W Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.0 Register addressing mode only Stack Pointer Address (Low Byte) The low-byte stack pointer value is the lower eight bits of the 16-bit stack pointer address (SP7–SP0). The upper byte of the stack pointer value is located in register SPH (D8H). The SP value is undefined following a reset. 4-38 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER STPCON — Stop Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.0 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W FBH .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 0 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only STOP Control Bits 10100101 Other values Enable stop instruction Disable stop instruction NOTE: Before execute the STOP instruction, set this STPCON register as “10100101b”. Otherwise the STOP instruction will not execute as well as reset will be generated. www.DataSheet4U.com 4-39 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B SYM — System Mode Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .6–.5 .4–.2 .7 0 R/W .6 – – .5 – – .4 x R/W .3 x R/W DEH .2 x R/W .1 0 R/W Set 1 .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only Not used, But you must keep "0" Not used for the S3C831B. Fast Interrupt Level Selection Bits (1) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 IRQ7 www.DataSheet4U.com 1 .1 Fast Interrupt Enable Bit (2) 0 1 Disable fast interrupt processing Enable fast interrupt processing .0 Global Interrupt Enable Bit (3) 0 1 Disable all interrupt processing Enable all interrupt processing NOTES: 1. You can select only one interrupt level at a time for fast interrupt processing. 2. Setting SYM.1 to "1" enables fast interrupt processing for the interrupt level currently selected by SYM.2-SYM.4. 3. Following a reset, you must enable global interrupt processing by executing an EI instruction (not by writing a "1" to SYM.0). 4-40 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER T0CON — Timer 0 Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.5 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W E2H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 0 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only Timer 0 Input Clock Selection Bits 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 fxx/1024 fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx External clock (T0CLK) falling edge External clock (T0CLK) rising edge Counter stop .4–.3 www.DataSheet4U.com Timer 0 Operating Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Interval mode Capture mode (capture on rising edge, counter running, OVF can occur) Capture mode (capture on falling edge, counter running, OVF can occur) PWM mode (OVF & match interrupt can occur) .2 Timer 0 Counter Clear Bit (note) 0 1 No effect Clear the timer 0 counter (when write) .1 Timer 0 Match/Capture Interrupt Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt .0 Timer 0 Overflow Interrupt Enable 0 1 Disable overflow interrupt Enable overflow interrupt NOTE: When you write a "1" to T0CON.2, the timer 0 counter value is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the write operation, the T0CON.2 value is automatically cleared to "0". 4-41 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B T1CON — Timer 1 Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.5 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W E5H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 0 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only Timer 1 Input Clock Selection Bits 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx External clock (T1CLK) input .4 .3 Not used for the S3C831B Timer 1 Counter Clear Bit (Note) 0 1 No effect Clear the timer 1 counter (when write) www.DataSheet4U.com .2 Timer 1 Counter Enable Bit 0 1 Disable counting operation Enable counting operation .1 Timer 1 Interrupt Enable Bit 0 1 Disable timer 1 interrupt Enable timer 1 interrupt .0 Timer 1 Interrupt Pending Bit 0 0 1 No timer 1 interrupt pending (when read) Clear timer 1 interrupt pending condition (when write) T1 interrupt is pending NOTE: When you write a "1" to T1CON.3, the timer 1 counter value is cleared to "00H”. Immediately following the write operation, the T1CON.3 value is automatically cleared to "0". 4-42 S3C831B/P831B CONTROL REGISTER T2CON — Timer 2 Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7–.5 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W FEH .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 1 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only Timer 2 Input Clock Selection Bits 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx External clock (T2CLK) input .4 .3 Not used for the S3C831B. Timer 2 Counter Clear Bit (Note) 0 1 No effect Clear the timer 2 counter (when write) www.DataSheet4U.com .2 Timer 2 Counter Enable Bit 0 1 Disable counting operation Enable counting operation .1 Timer 2 Interrupt Enable Bit 0 1 Disable timer 2 interrupt Enable timer 2 interrupt .0 Timer 2 Interrupt Pending Bit 0 0 1 No timer 2 interrupt pending (when read) Clear timer 2 interrupt pending bit (when write) T2 interrupt is pending NOTE: When you write a "1" to T2CON.3, the timer 2 counter value is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the write operation, the T2CON.3 value is automatically cleared to "0". 4-43 CONTROL REGISTERS S3C831B/P831B WTCON — Watch Timer Control Register Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .6 .7 – – .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W E8H .2 0 R/W Set 1, Bank 0 .1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W Register addressing mode only Not used for the S3C831B. Watch Timer Enable Bit 0 1 Disable watch timer; clear frequency dividing circuits Enable watch timer .5–.4 Buzzer Signal Selection Bits (When fxx= 4.5 MHz) 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 kHz buzzer (BUZ) signal output 1.5 kHz buzzer (BUZ) signal output 3 kHz buzzer (BUZ) signal output 6 kHz buzzer (BUZ) signal output www.DataSheet4U.com .3–.2 Watch Timer Speed Selection Bits (When fxx=4.5 MHz) 0 0 1 0 1 1 1.0 s Interval 0.5 s Interval 50 ms Interval .1 Watch Timer Interrupt Enable Bit 0 1 Disable watch timer interrupt Enable watch timer interrupt .0 Watch Timer Interrupt Pending Bit 0 1 1 Interrupt is not pending (when read) Clear pending bit (when write) Interrupt is pending (when read) NOTE: If the main clock is 9MHz, IFMOD.7 should be set to "1". 4-44 S3C831B/P831B INTERRUPT STRUCTURE 5 OVERVIEW Levels INTERRUPT STRUCTURE The S3C8-series interrupt structure has three basic components: levels, vectors, and sources. The SAM88RC CPU recognizes up to eight interrupt levels and supports up to 128 interrupt vectors. When a specific interrupt level has more than one vector address, the vector priorities are established in hardware. A vector address can be assigned to one or more sources. Interrupt levels are the main unit for interrupt priority assignment and recognition. All peripherals and I/O blocks can issue interrupt requests. In other words, peripheral and I/O operations are interrupt-driven. There are eight possible interrupt levels: IRQ0–IRQ7, also called level 0–level 7. Each interrupt level directly corresponds to an interrupt request number (IRQn). The total number of interrupt levels used in the interrupt structure varies from device to device. The S3C831B interrupt structure recognizes eight interrupt levels. The interrupt level numbers 0 through 7 do not necessarily indicate the relative priority of the levels. They are just identifiers for the interrupt levels that are recognized by the CPU. The relative priority of different interrupt levels is determined by settings in the interrupt priority register, IPR. Interrupt group and subgroup logic controlled by www.DataSheet4U.com IPR settings lets you define more complex priority relationships between different levels. Vectors Each interrupt level can have one or more interrupt vectors, or it may have no vector address assigned at all. The maximum number of vectors that can be supported for a given level is 128 (The actual number of vectors used for S3C8-series devices is always much smaller). If an interrupt level has more than one vector address, the vector priorities are set in hardware. S3C831B uses seventeen vectors. Sources A source is any peripheral that generates an interrupt. A source can be an external pin or a counter overflow. Each vector can have several interrupt sources. In the S3C831B interrupt structure, there are seventeen possible interrupt sources. When a service routine starts, the respective pending bit should be either cleared automatically by hardware or cleared "manually" by program software. The characteristics of the source's pending mechanism determine which method would be used to clear its respective pending bit. 5-1 INTERRUPT STRUCTURE S3C831B/P831B INTERRUPT TYPES The three components of the S3C8 interrupt structure described before — levels, vectors, and sources — are combined to determine the interrupt structure of an individual device and to make full use of its available interrupt logic. There are three possible combinations of interrupt structure components, called interrupt types 1, 2, and 3. The types differ in the number of vectors and interrupt sources assigned to each level (see Figure 5-1): Type 1: Type 2: Type 3: One level (IRQn) + one vector (V1) + one source (S1) One level (IRQn) + one vector (V1) + multiple sources (S1 – Sn) One level (IRQn) + multiple vectors (V1 – Vn) + multiple sources (S1 – Sn , Sn+1 – Sn+m) In the S3C831B microcontroller, two interrupt types are implemented. Levels Type 1: IRQn Vectors V1 Sources S1 S1 Type 2: IRQn V1 S2 S3 www.DataSheet4U.com Sn V1 Type 3: IRQn V2 V3 Vn S1 S2 S3 Sn Sn + 1 Sn + 2 Sn + m NOTES: 1. The number of Sn and Vn value is expandable. 2. In the S3C831B implementation, interrupt types 1 and 3 are used. Figure 5-1. S3C8-Series Interrupt Types 5-2 S3C831B/P831B INTERRUPT STRUCTURE S3C831B INTERRUPT STRUCTURE The S3C831B microcontroller supports seventeen interrupt sources. All seventeen of the interrupt sources have a corresponding interrupt vector address. Eight interrupt levels are recognized by the CPU in this device-specific interrupt structure, as shown in Figure 5-2. When multiple interrupt levels are active, the interrupt priority register (IPR) determines the order in which contending interrupts are to be serviced. If multiple interrupts occur within the same interrupt level, the interrupt with the lowest vector address is usually processed first (The relative priorities of multiple interrupts within a single level are fixed in hardware). When the CPU grants an interrupt request, interrupt processing starts. All other interrupts are disabled and the program counter value and status flags are pushed to stack. The starting address of the service routine is fetched from the appropriate vector address (plus the next 8-bit value to concatenate the full 16-bit address) and the service routine is executed. Levels RESET IRQ0 Vectors 100H E0H E2H E4H Sources Basic timer overflow Timer 0 match/capture Timer 0 overflow Timer 2 match Timer 1 match SIO1 interrupt SIO0 interrupt Watch timer P1.0 external interrupt P1.1 external interrupt P1.2 external interrupt P1.3 external interrupt P1.4 external interrupt P1.5 external interrupt P1.6 external interrupt P1.7 external interrupt CE interrupt IF interrupt Reset/Clear H/W S/W H/W,S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W IRQ1 E6H E8H www.DataSheet4U.com IRQ2 EAH IRQ3 F2H D0H D2H IRQ4 D4H D6H D8H DAH IRQ5 DCH DEH IRQ6 IRQ7 C0H C2H NOTES: 1. Within a given interrupt level, the low vector address has high priority. For example, E0H has higher priority than E2H within the level IRQ0. The priorities within each level are set at the factory. 2. External interrupts are triggered by a rising or falling edge, depending on the corresponding control register setting. Figure 5-2. S3C831B Interrupt Structure 5-3 INTERRUPT STRUCTURE S3C831B/P831B INTERRUPT VECTOR ADDRESSES All interrupt vector addresses for the S3C831B interrupt structure are stored in the vector address area of the first 256 bytes of the program memory (ROM). You can allocate unused locations in the vector address area as normal program memory. If you do so, please be careful not to overwrite any of the stored vector addresses (Table 5-1 lists all vector addresses). The program reset address in the ROM is 0100H. (Decimal) 65,535 (HEX) FFFFH 64K-byte Program Memory Area www.DataSheet4U.com 255 Interrupt Vector Address Area 0 100H FFH RESET Address 00H Figure 5-3. ROM Vector Address Area 5-4 S3C831B/P831B INTERRUPT STRUCTURE Table 5-1. Interrupt Vectors Vector Address Decimal Value 256 226 224 230 228 234 232 242 214 212 210 208 222 220 218 www.DataSheet4U.com Interrupt Source Request Interrupt Level Priority in Level – 1 0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 1 0 1 0 – 3 2 1 0 IRQ5 3 2 1 0 IRQ6 IRQ7 – – Reset/Clear H/W √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ S/W Hex Value 100H E2H E0H E6H E4H EAH E8H F2H D6H D4H D2H D0H DEH DCH DAH D8H C0H C2H Basic timer overflow Timer 0 overflow Timer 0 match/capture Timer 1 match Timer 2 match SIO0 interrupt SIO1 interrupt Watch timer P1.3 external interrupt P1.2 external interrupt P1.1 external interrupt P1.0 external interrupt P1.7 external interrupt P1.6 external interrupt P1.5 external interrupt P1.4 external interrupt CE interrupt IF interrupt RESET IRQ0 216 192 194 NOTES: 1. Interrupt priorities are identified in inverse order: "0" is the highest priority, "1" is the next highest, and so on. 2. If two or more interrupts within the same level contend, the interrupt with the lowest vector address usually has priority over one with a higher vector address. The priorities within a given level are fixed in hardware. 5-5 INTERRUPT STRUCTURE S3C831B/P831B ENABLE/DISABLE INTERRUPT INSTRUCTIONS (EI, DI) Executing the Enable Interrupts (EI) instruction globally enables the interrupt structure. All interrupts are then serviced as they occur according to the established priorities. NOTE The system initialization routine executed after a reset must always contain an EI instruction to globally enable the interrupt structure. During the normal operation, you can execute the DI (Disable Interrupt) instruction at any time to globally disable interrupt processing. The EI and DI instructions change the value of bit 0 in the SYM register. SYSTEM-LEVEL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTERS In addition to the control registers for specific interrupt sources, four system-level registers control interrupt processing: — The interrupt mask register, IMR, enables (un-masks) or disables (masks) interrupt levels. — The interrupt priority register, IPR, controls the relative priorities of interrupt levels. — The interrupt request register, IRQ, contains interrupt pending flags for each interrupt level (as opposed to each interrupt source). — The system mode register, SYM, enables or disables global interrupt processing (SYM settings also enable fast interrupts and control the activity of external interface, if implemented). www.DataSheet4U.com Table 5-2. Interrupt Control Register Overview Control Register Interrupt mask register Interrupt priority register ID IMR IPR R/W R/W R/W Function Description Bit settings in the IMR register enable or disable interrupt processing for each of the eight interrupt levels: IRQ0–IRQ7. Controls the relative processing priorities of the interrupt levels. The eight levels of S3C831B are organized into three groups: A, B, and C. Group A is IRQ0 and IRQ1, group B is IRQ2, IRQ3 and IRQ4, and group C is IRQ5, IRQ6, and IRQ7. This register contains a request pending bit for each interrupt level. This register enables/disables fast interrupt processing, and dynamic global interrupt processing. Interrupt request register System mode register IRQ SYM R R/W NOTE: Before IMR register is changed to any value, all interrupts must be disable. Using DI instruction is recommended. 5-6 S3C831B/P831B INTERRUPT STRUCTURE INTERRUPT PROCESSING CONTROL POINTS Interrupt processing can therefore be controlled in two ways: globally or by specific interrupt level and source. The system-level control points in the interrupt structure are: — Global interrupt enable and disable (by EI and DI instructions or by direct manipulation of SYM.0 ) — Interrupt level enable/disable settings (IMR register) — Interrupt level priority settings (IPR register) — Interrupt source enable/disable settings in the corresponding peripheral control registers NOTE When writing an application program that handles interrupt processing, be sure to include the necessary register file address (register pointer) information. EI RESET IRQ0-IRQ7, Interrupts S R Q Interrupt Request Register (Read-only) Polling Cycle www.DataSheet4U.com Interrupt Priority Register Vector Interrupt Cycle Interrupt Mask Register Global Interrupt Control (EI, DI or SYM.0 manipulation) Figure 5-4. Interrupt Function Diagram 5-7 INTERRUPT STRUCTURE S3C831B/P831B PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTERS For each interrupt source there is one or more corresponding peripheral control registers that let you control the interrupt generated by the related peripheral (see Table 5-3). Table 5-3. Interrupt Source Control and Data Registers Interrupt Source Timer 0 overflow Timer 0 match/capture Interrupt Level IRQ0 Register(s) T0CON T0CNT T0DATA INTPND T1CON T1CNT T1DATA T2CON T2CNTH, T2CNTL T2DATAH, T2DATAL IRQ2 SIO0CON SIO0DATA SIO0PS SIO1CON SIO1DATA SIO1PS WTCON P1CONL P1INT P1PND P1CONH P1INT P1PND PLLMOD PLLREF PLLD1, PLLD0 IFMOD IFCNT1, IFCNT0 PLLMOD PLLREF Location(s) in Set 1 E2H, bank 0 E0H, bank 0 E1H, bank 0 E6H, bank 0 E5H, bank 0 E3H, bank 0 E4H, bank0 FEH, bank 1 FAH, FBH, bank 1 FCH, FDH, bank 1 E9H, bank 0 EAH, bank 0 EBH, bank 0 ECH, bank 0 EDH, bank 0 EEH, bank 0 E8H, bank 0 E5H, bank 1 E6H, bank 1 E7H, bank 1 E4H, bank 1 E6H, bank 1 E7H, bank 1 F8H, bank 0 F9H, bank 0 F6H, F7H, bank 0 F3H, bank 0 F4H, F5H, bank 0 F8H, bank 0 F9H, bank 0 Timer 1 match IRQ1 Timer 2 match SIO0 interrupt SIO1 interrupt www.DataSheet4U.com Watch timer P1.3 external interrupt P1.2 external interrupt P1.1 external interrupt P1.0 external interrupt P1.7 external interrupt P1.6 external interrupt P1.5 external interrupt P1.4 external interrupt CE interrupt IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 IF interrupt IRQ7 5-8 S3C831B/P831B INTERRUPT STRUCTURE SYSTEM MODE REGISTER (SYM) The system mode register, SYM (set 1, DEH), is used to globally enable and disable interrupt processing and to control fast interrupt processing (see Figure 5-5). A reset clears SYM.1, and SYM.0 to "0". The 3-bit value for fast interrupt level selection, SYM.4–SYM.2, is undetermined. The instructions EI and DI enable and disable global interrupt processing, respectively, by modifying the bit 0 value of the SYM register. In order to enable interrupt processing an Enable Interrupt (EI) instruction must be included in the initialization routine, which follows a reset operation. Although you can manipulate SYM.0 directly to enable and disable interrupts during the normal operation, it is recommended to use the EI and DI instructions for this purpose. System Mode Register (SYM) DEH, Set 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Always logic "0" www.DataSheet4U.com Global interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable all interrupts processing 1 = Enable all interrupts processing Fast interrupt level selection bits: 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 IRQ7 Fast interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable fast interrupts processing 1 = Enable fast interrupts processing Not used for the S3C831B. Figure 5-5. System Mode Register (SYM) 5-9 INTERRUPT STRUCTURE S3C831B/P831B INTERRUPT MASK REGISTER (IMR) The interrupt mask register, IMR (set 1, DDH) is used to enable or disable interrupt processing for individual interrupt levels. After a reset, all IMR bit values are undetermined and must therefore be written to their required settings by the initialization routine. Each IMR bit corresponds to a specific interrupt level: bit 1 to IRQ1, bit 2 to IRQ2, and so on. When the IMR bit of an interrupt level is cleared to "0", interrupt processing for that level is disabled (masked). When you set a level's IMR bit to "1", interrupt processing for the level is enabled (not masked). The IMR register is mapped to register location DDH in set 1. Bit values can be read and written by instructions using the Register addressing mode. Interrupt Mask Register (IMR) DDH, Set 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB www.DataSheet4U.com IRQ2 IRQ6 IRQ5 IRQ4 IRQ3 IRQ1 IRQ0 IRQ7 Interrupt level enable bits 0 = Disable (mask) interrupt level 1 = Enable (un-mask) interrupt level NOTE: Before IMR register is changed to any value, all interrupts must be disable. Using DI instruction is recommended. Figure 5-6. Interrupt Mask Register (IMR) 5-10 S3C831B/P831B INTERRUPT STRUCTURE INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER (IPR) The interrupt priority register, IPR (set 1, bank 0, FFH), is used to set the relative priorities of the interrupt levels in the microcontroller’s interrupt structure. After a reset, all IPR bit values are undetermined and must therefore be written to their required settings by the initialization routine. When more than one interrupt sources are active, the source with the highest priority level is serviced first. If two sources belong to the same interrupt level, the source with the lower vector address usually has the priority (This priority is fixed in hardware). To support programming of the relative interrupt level priorities, they are organized into groups and subgroups by the interrupt logic. Please note that these groups (and subgroups) are used only by IPR logic for the IPR register priority definitions (see Figure 5-7): Group A Group B Group C IRQ0, IRQ1 IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ3 IRQ5, IRQ6, IRQ7 IPR Group A IPR Group B IPR Group C www.DataSheet4U.com A1 A2 B1 B21 B2 B22 IRQ4 C1 C21 IRQ5 IRQ6 C2 C22 IRQ7 IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 Figure 5-7. Interrupt Request Priority Groups As you can see in Figure 5-8, IPR.7, IPR.4, and IPR.1 control the relative priority of interrupt groups A, B, and C. For example, the setting "001B" for these bits would select the group relationship B > C > A. The setting "101B" would select the relationship C > B > A. The functions of the other IPR bit settings are as follows: — IPR.5 controls the relative priorities of group C interrupts. — Interrupt group C includes a subgroup that has an additional priority relationship among the interrupt levels 5, 6, and 7. IPR.6 defines the subgroup C relationship. IPR.5 controls the interrupt group C. — IPR.0 controls the relative priority setting of IRQ0 and IRQ1 interrupts. 5-11 INTERRUPT STRUCTURE S3C831B/P831B Interrupt Priority Register (IPR) FFH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB Group priority: D7 D4 D1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 = Undefined =B>C>A =A>B>C =B>A>C =C>A>B =C>B>A =A>C>B = Undefined .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Group A 0 = IRQ0 > IRQ1 1 = IRQ1 > IRQ0 Group B 0 = IRQ2 > (IRQ3, IRQ4) 1 = (IRQ3, IRQ4) > IRQ2 Subgroup B 0 = IRQ3 > IRQ4 1 = IRQ4 > IRQ3 Group C 0 = IRQ5 > (IRQ6, IRQ7) 1 = (IRQ6, IRQ7) > IRQ5 Subgroup C 0 = IRQ6 > IRQ7 1 = IRQ7 > IRQ6 www.DataSheet4U.com Figure 5-8. Interrupt Priority Register (IPR) 5-12 S3C831B/P831B INTERRUPT STRUCTURE INTERRUPT REQUEST REGISTER (IRQ) You can poll bit values in the interrupt request register, IRQ (set 1, DCH), to monitor interrupt request status for all levels in the microcontroller’s interrupt structure. Each bit corresponds to the interrupt level of the same number: bit 0 to IRQ0, bit 1 to IRQ1, and so on. A "0" indicates that no interrupt request is currently being issued for that level. A "1" indicates that an interrupt request has been generated for that level. IRQ bit values are read-only addressable using Register addressing mode. You can read (test) the contents of the IRQ register at any time using bit or byte addressing to determine the current interrupt request status of specific interrupt levels. After a reset, all IRQ status bits are cleared to “0”. You can poll IRQ register values even if a DI instruction has been executed (that is, if global interrupt processing is disabled). If an interrupt occurs while the interrupt structure is disabled, the CPU will not service it. You can, however, still detect the interrupt request by polling the IRQ register. In this way, you can determine which events occurred while the interrupt structure was globally disabled. Interrupt Request Register (IRQ) DCH, Set 1, Read-only MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB www.DataSheet4U.com IRQ7 IRQ6 IRQ5 IRQ4 IRQ3 IRQ2 IRQ1 IRQ0 Interrupt level request pending bits: 0 = Interrupt level is not pending 1 = Interrupt level is pending Figure 5-9. Interrupt Request Register (IRQ) 5-13 INTERRUPT STRUCTURE S3C831B/P831B INTERRUPT PENDING FUNCTION TYPES Overview There are two types of interrupt pending bits: one type that is automatically cleared by hardware after the interrupt service routine is acknowledged and executed; the other that must be cleared in the interrupt service routine. Pending Bits Cleared Automatically by Hardware For interrupt pending bits that are cleared automatically by hardware, interrupt logic sets the corresponding pending bit to "1" when a request occurs. It then issues an IRQ pulse to inform the CPU that an interrupt is waiting to be serviced. The CPU acknowledges the interrupt source by sending an IACK, executes the service routine, and clears the pending bit to "0". This type of pending bit is not mapped and cannot, therefore, be read or written by application software. In the S3C831B interrupt structure, the timer 0 overflow interrupt (IRQ0) belongs to this category of interrupts in which pending condition is cleared automatically by hardware. Pending Bits Cleared by the Service Routine The second type of pending bit is the one that should be cleared by program software. The service routine must clear the appropriate pending bit before a return-from-interrupt subroutine (IRET) occurs. To do this, a "0" must be written to the corresponding pending bit location in the source’s mode or control register. www.DataSheet4U.com 5-14 S3C831B/P831B INTERRUPT STRUCTURE INTERRUPT SOURCE POLLING SEQUENCE The interrupt request polling and servicing sequence is as follows: 1. A source generates an interrupt request by setting the interrupt request bit to "1". 2. The CPU polling procedure identifies a pending condition for that source. 3. The CPU checks the source's interrupt level. 4. The CPU generates an interrupt acknowledge signal. 5. Interrupt logic determines the interrupt's vector address. 6. The service routine starts and the source's pending bit is cleared to "0" (by hardware or by software). 7. The CPU continues polling for interrupt requests. INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINES Before an interrupt request is serviced, the following conditions must be met: — Interrupt processing must be globally enabled (EI, SYM.0 = "1") — The interrupt level must be enabled (IMR register) — The interrupt level must have the highest priority if more than one levels are currently requesting service — The interrupt must be enabled at the interrupt's source (peripheral control register) When all the above conditions are met, the interrupt request is acknowledged at the end of the instruction cycle. The CPU then initiates an interrupt machine cycle that completes the following processing sequence: 1. Reset (clear to "0") the interrupt enable bit in the SYM register (SYM.0) to disable all subsequent interrupts. 2. Save the program counter (PC) and status flags to the system stack. 3. Branch to the interrupt vector to fetch the address of the service routine. 4. Pass control to the interrupt service routine. When the interrupt service routine is completed, the CPU issues an Interrupt Return (IRET). The IRET restores the PC and status flags, setting SYM.0 to "1". It allows the CPU to process the next interrupt request. www.DataSheet4U.com 5-15 INTERRUPT STRUCTURE S3C831B/P831B GENERATING INTERRUPT VECTOR ADDRESSES The interrupt vector area in the ROM (00H–FFH) contains the addresses of interrupt service routines that correspond to each level in the interrupt structure. Vectored interrupt processing follows this sequence: 1. Push the program counter's low-byte value to the stack. 2. Push the program counter's high-byte value to the stack. 3. Push the FLAG register values to the stack. 4. Fetch the service routine's high-byte address from the vector location. 5. Fetch the service routine's low-byte address from the vector location. 6. Branch to the service routine specified by the concatenated 16-bit vector address. NOTE A 16-bit vector address always begins at an even-numbered ROM address within the range of 00H–FFH. NESTING OF VECTORED INTERRUPTS It is possible to nest a higher-priority interrupt request while a lower-priority request is being serviced. To do this, you must follow these steps: 1. Push the current 8-bit interrupt mask register (IMR) value to the stack (PUSH IMR). 2. Load the IMR register with a new mask value that enables only the higher priority interrupt. www.DataSheet4U.com 3. Execute an EI instruction to enable interrupt processing (a higher priority interrupt will be processed if it occurs). 4. When the lower-priority interrupt service routine ends, restore the IMR to its original value by returning the previous mask value from the stack (POP IMR). 5. Execute an IRET. Depending on the application, you may be able to simplify the procedure above to some extent. INSTRUCTION POINTER (IP) The instruction pointer (IP) is adopted by all the S3C8-series microcontrollers to control the optional high-speed interrupt processing feature called fast interrupts. The IP consists of register pair DAH and DBH. The names of IP registers are IPH (high byte, IP15–IP8) and IPL (low byte, IP7–IP0). FAST INTERRUPT PROCESSING The feature called fast interrupt processing allows an interrupt within a given level to be completed in approximately 6 clock cycles rather than the usual 16 clock cycles. To select a specific interrupt level for fast interrupt processing, you write the appropriate 3-bit value to SYM.4–SYM.2. Then, to enable fast interrupt processing for the selected level, you set SYM.1 to “1”. 5-16 S3C831B/P831B INTERRUPT STRUCTURE FAST INTERRUPT PROCESSING (Continued) Two other system registers support fast interrupt processing: — The instruction pointer (IP) contains the starting address of the service routine (and is later used to swap the program counter values), and — When a fast interrupt occurs, the contents of the FLAGS register is stored in an unmapped, dedicated register called FLAGS' ("FLAGS prime"). NOTE For the S3C831B microcontroller, the service routine for any one of the eight interrupt levels: IRQ0– IRQ7, can be selected for fast interrupt processing. Procedure for Initiating Fast Interrupts To initiate fast interrupt processing, follow these steps: 1. Load the start address of the service routine into the instruction pointer (IP). 2. Load the interrupt level number (IRQn) into the fast interrupt selection field (SYM.4–SYM.2) 3. Write a "1" to the fast interrupt enable bit in the SYM register. Fast Interrupt Service Routine When an interrupt occurs in the level selected for fast interrupt processing, the following events occur: www.DataSheet4U.com 1. The contents of the instruction pointer and the PC are swapped. 2. The FLAG register values are written to the FLAGS' (“FLAGS prime”) register. 3. The fast interrupt status bit in the FLAGS register is set. 4. The interrupt is serviced. 5. Assuming that the fast interrupt status bit is set, when the fast interrupt service routine ends, the instruction pointer and PC values are swapped back. 6. The content of FLAGS' ("FLAGS prime") is copied automatically back to the FLAGS register. 7. The fast interrupt status bit in FLAGS is cleared automatically. Relationship to Interrupt Pending Bit Types As described previously, there are two types of interrupt pending bits: One type that is automatically cleared by hardware after the interrupt service routine is acknowledged and executed; the other that must be cleared by the application program's interrupt service routine. You can select fast interrupt processing for interrupts with either type of pending condition clear function — by hardware or by software. Programming Guidelines Remember that the only way to enable/disable a fast interrupt is to set/clear the fast interrupt enable bit in the SYM register, SYM.1. Executing an EI or DI instruction globally enables or disables all interrupt processing, including fast interrupts. If you use fast interrupts, remember to load the IP with a new start address when the fast interrupt service routine ends. 5-17 INTERRUPT STRUCTURE S3C831B/P831B NOTES www.DataSheet4U.com 5-18 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET 6 OVERVIEW INSTRUCTION SET The SAM88RC instruction set is specifically designed to support the large register files that are typical of most SAM8 microcontrollers. There are 78 instructions. The powerful data manipulation capabilities and features of the instruction set include: — A full complement of 8-bit arithmetic and logic operations, including multiply and divide — No special I/O instructions (I/O control/data registers are mapped directly into the register file) — Decimal adjustment included in binary-coded decimal (BCD) operations — 16-bit (word) data can be incremented and decremented — Flexible instructions for bit addressing, rotate, and shift operations DATA TYPES www.DataSheet4U.com The SAM8 CPU performs operations on bits, bytes, BCD digits, and two-byte words. Bits in the register file can be set, cleared, complemented, and tested. Bits within a byte are numbered from 7 to 0, where bit 0 is the least significant (right-most) bit. REGISTER ADDRESSING To access an individual register, an 8-bit address in the range 0-255 or the 4-bit address of a working register is specified. Paired registers can be used to construct 16-bit data or 16-bit program memory or data memory addresses. For detailed information about register addressing, please refer to Section 2, "Address Spaces." ADDRESSING MODES There are seven explicit addressing modes: Register (R), Indirect Register (IR), Indexed (X), Direct (DA), Relative (RA), Immediate (IM), and Indirect (IA). For detailed descriptions of these addressing modes, please refer to Section 3, "Addressing Modes." 6-1 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary Mnemonic Operands Instruction Load Instructions CLR LD LDB LDE LDC LDED LDCD LDEI LDCI LDEPD LDCPD LDEPI LDCPI LDW POP www.DataSheet4U.com dst dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst dst,src dst,src src dst,src dst,src Clear Load Load bit Load external data memory Load program memory Load external data memory and decrement Load program memory and decrement Load external data memory and increment Load program memory and increment Load external data memory with pre-decrement Load program memory with pre-decrement Load external data memory with pre-increment Load program memory with pre-increment Load word Pop from stack Pop user stack (decrementing) Pop user stack (incrementing) Push to stack Push user stack (decrementing) Push user stack (incrementing) POPUD POPUI PUSH PUSHUD PUSHUI 6-2 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary (Continued) Mnemonic Operands Instruction Arithmetic Instructions ADC ADD CP DA DEC DECW DIV INC INCW MULT SBC SUB dst,src dst,src dst,src dst dst dst dst,src dst dst dst,src dst,src dst,src Add with carry Add Compare Decimal adjust Decrement Decrement word Divide Increment Increment word Multiply Subtract with carry Subtract Logic Instructions www.DataSheet4U.com AND COM OR XOR dst,src dst dst,src dst,src Logical AND Complement Logical OR Logical exclusive OR 6-3 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary (Continued) Mnemonic Operands Instruction Program Control Instructions BTJRF BTJRT CALL CPIJE CPIJNE DJNZ ENTER EXIT IRET JP JP JR NEXT RET WFI www.DataSheet4U.com dst,src dst,src dst dst,src dst,src r,dst Bit test and jump relative on false Bit test and jump relative on true Call procedure Compare, increment and jump on equal Compare, increment and jump on non-equal Decrement register and jump on non-zero Enter Exit Interrupt return cc,dst dst cc,dst Jump on condition code Jump unconditional Jump relative on condition code Next Return Wait for interrupt Bit Manipulation Instructions BAND BCP BITC BITR BITS BOR BXOR TCM TM dst,src dst,src dst dst dst dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src Bit AND Bit compare Bit complement Bit reset Bit set Bit OR Bit XOR Test complement under mask Test under mask 6-4 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary (Concluded) Mnemonic Operands Instruction Rotate and Shift Instructions RL RLC RR RRC SRA SWAP dst dst dst dst dst dst Rotate left Rotate left through carry Rotate right Rotate right through carry Shift right arithmetic Swap nibbles CPU Control Instructions CCF DI EI IDLE NOP RCF www.DataSheet4U.com Complement carry flag Disable interrupts Enable interrupts Enter Idle mode No operation Reset carry flag Set bank 0 Set bank 1 Set carry flag src src src Set register pointers Set register pointer 0 Set register pointer 1 Enter Stop mode SB0 SB1 SCF SRP SRP0 SRP1 STOP 6-5 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B FLAGS REGISTER (FLAGS) The flags register FLAGS contains eight bits that describe the current status of CPU operations. Four of these bits, FLAGS.7–FLAGS.4, can be tested and used with conditional jump instructions; two others FLAGS.3 and FLAGS.2 are used for BCD arithmetic. The FLAGS register also contains a bit to indicate the status of fast interrupt processing (FLAGS.1) and a bank address status bit (FLAGS.0) to indicate whether bank 0 or bank 1 is currently being addressed. FLAGS register can be set or reset by instructions as long as its outcome does not affect the flags, such as, Load instruction. Logical and Arithmetic instructions such as, AND, OR, XOR, ADD, and SUB can affect the Flags register. For example, the AND instruction updates the Zero, Sign and Overflow flags based on the outcome of the AND instruction. If the AND instruction uses the Flags register as the destination, then simultaneously, two write will occur to the Flags register producing an unpredictable result. System Flags Register (FLAGS) D5H, Set 1, R/W MSB Carry flag (C) .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Bank address status flag (BA) Fast interrupt status flag (FS) Half-carry flag (H) Zero flag (Z) www.DataSheet4U.com Sign flag (S) Overflow flag (V) Decimal adjust flag (D) Figure 6-1. System Flags Register (FLAGS) 6-6 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET FLAG DESCRIPTIONS C Carry Flag (FLAGS.7) The C flag is set to "1" if the result from an arithmetic operation generates a carry-out from or a borrow to the bit 7 position (MSB). After rotate and shift operations, it contains the last value shifted out of the specified register. Program instructions can set, clear, or complement the carry flag. Z Zero Flag (FLAGS.6) For arithmetic and logic operations, the Z flag is set to "1" if the result of the operation is zero. For operations that test register bits, and for shift and rotate operations, the Z flag is set to "1" if the result is logic zero. S V D www.DataSheet4U.com Sign Flag (FLAGS.5) Following arithmetic, logic, rotate, or shift operations, the sign bit identifies the state of the MSB of the result. A logic zero indicates a positive number and a logic one indicates a negative number. Overflow Flag (FLAGS.4) The V flag is set to "1" when the result of a two's-complement operation is greater than + 127 or less than – 128. It is also cleared to "0" following logic operations. Decimal Adjust Flag (FLAGS.3) The DA bit is used to specify what type of instruction was executed last during BCD operations, so that a subsequent decimal adjust operation can execute correctly. The DA bit is not usually accessed by programmers, and cannot be used as a test condition. Half-Carry Flag (FLAGS.2) The H bit is set to "1" whenever an addition generates a carry-out of bit 3, or when a subtraction borrows out of bit 4. It is used by the Decimal Adjust (DA) instruction to convert the binary result of a previous addition or subtraction into the correct decimal (BCD) result. The H flag is seldom accessed directly by a program. H FIS Fast Interrupt Status Flag (FLAGS.1) The FIS bit is set during a fast interrupt cycle and reset during the IRET following interrupt servicing. When set, it inhibits all interrupts and causes the fast interrupt return to be executed when the IRET instruction is executed. BA Bank Address Flag (FLAGS.0) The BA flag indicates which register bank in the set 1 area of the internal register file is currently selected, bank 0 or bank 1. The BA flag is cleared to "0" (select bank 0) when you execute the SB0 instruction and is set to "1" (select bank 1) when you execute the SB1 instruction. 6-7 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET NOTATION Table 6-2. Flag Notation Conventions Flag C Z S V D H 0 1 * – x Carry flag Zero flag Sign flag Overflow flag Decimal-adjust flag Half-carry flag Cleared to logic zero Set to logic one Set or cleared according to operation Value is unaffected Value is undefined Description Table 6-3. Instruction Set Symbols Symbol dst www.DataSheet4U.com Description Destination operand Source operand Indirect register address prefix Program counter Instruction pointer Flags register (D5H) Register pointer Immediate operand or register address prefix Hexadecimal number suffix Decimal number suffix Binary number suffix Opcode src @ PC IP FLAGS RP # H D B opc 6-8 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET Table 6-4. Instruction Notation Conventions Notation cc r rb r0 rr R Rb RR IA Ir IR Irr IRR X XS www.DataSheet4U.com Description Condition code Working register only Bit (b) of working register Bit 0 (LSB) of working register Working register pair Register or working register Bit 'b' of register or working register Register pair or working register pair Indirect addressing mode Indirect working register only Indirect working register pair only Indirect register pair or indirect working register pair Indexed addressing mode Indexed (short offset) addressing mode Indexed (long offset) addressing mode Direct addressing mode Relative addressing mode Immediate addressing mode Immediate (long) addressing mode Rn (n = 0–15) Actual Operand Range See list of condition codes in Table 6-6. Rn.b (n = 0–15, b = 0–7) Rn (n = 0–15) RRp (p = 0, 2, 4, ..., 14) reg or Rn (reg = 0–255, n = 0–15) reg.b (reg = 0–255, b = 0–7) reg or RRp (reg = 0–254, even number only, where p = 0, 2, ..., 14) addr (addr = 0–254, even number only) @Rn (n = 0–15) @RRp (p = 0, 2, ..., 14) @RRp or @reg (reg = 0–254, even only, where p = 0, 2, ..., 14) #reg [Rn] (reg = 0–255, n = 0–15) #addr [RRp] (addr = range –128 to +127, where p = 0, 2, ..., 14) #addr [RRp] (addr = range 0–65535, where p = 0, 2, ..., 14) addr (addr = range 0–65535) addr (addr = number in the range +127 to –128 that is an offset relative to the address of the next instruction) #data (data = 0–255) #data (data = range 0–65535) Indirect register or indirect working register @Rn or @reg (reg = 0–255, n = 0–15) xl da ra im iml 6-9 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B Table 6-5. Opcode Quick Reference OPCODE MAP LOWER NIBBLE (HEX) – U P P E R 0 1 2 3 4 5 N I B www.DataSheet4U.com 0 DEC R1 RLC R1 INC R1 JP IRR1 DA R1 POP R1 COM R1 PUSH R2 DECW RR1 RL R1 INCW RR1 CLR R1 RRC R1 SRA R1 RR R1 SWAP R1 1 DEC IR1 RLC IR1 INC IR1 SRP/0/1 IM DA IR1 POP IR1 COM IR1 PUSH IR2 DECW IR1 RL IR1 INCW IR1 CLR IR1 RRC IR1 SRA IR1 RR IR1 SWAP IR1 2 ADD r1,r2 ADC r1,r2 SUB r1,r2 SBC r1,r2 OR r1,r2 AND r1,r2 TCM r1,r2 TM r1,r2 PUSHUD IR1,R2 POPUD IR2,R1 CP r1,r2 XOR r1,r2 CPIJE Ir,r2,RA CPIJNE Irr,r2,RA LDCD r1,Irr2 LDCPD r2,Irr1 3 ADD r1,Ir2 ADC r1,Ir2 SUB r1,Ir2 SBC r1,Ir2 OR r1,Ir2 AND r1,Ir2 TCM r1,Ir2 TM r1,Ir2 PUSHUI IR1,R2 POPUI IR2,R1 CP r1,Ir2 XOR r1,Ir2 LDC r1,Irr2 LDC r2,Irr1 LDCI r1,Irr2 LDCPI r2,Irr1 4 ADD R2,R1 ADC R2,R1 SUB R2,R1 SBC R2,R1 OR R2,R1 AND R2,R1 TCM R2,R1 TM R2,R1 MULT R2,RR1 DIV R2,RR1 CP R2,R1 XOR R2,R1 LDW RR2,RR1 CALL IA1 LD R2,R1 CALL IRR1 5 ADD IR2,R1 ADC IR2,R1 SUB IR2,R1 SBC IR2,R1 OR IR2,R1 AND IR2,R1 TCM IR2,R1 TM IR2,R1 MULT IR2,RR1 DIV IR2,RR1 CP IR2,R1 XOR IR2,R1 LDW IR2,RR1 6 ADD R1,IM ADC R1,IM SUB R1,IM SBC R1,IM OR R1,IM AND R1,IM TCM R1,IM TM R1,IM MULT IM,RR1 DIV IM,RR1 CP R1,IM XOR R1,IM LDW RR1,IML LD IR1,IM 7 BOR r0–Rb BCP r1.b, R2 BXOR r0–Rb BTJR r2.b, RA LDB r0–Rb BITC r1.b BAND r0–Rb BIT r1.b LD r1, x, r2 LD r2, x, r1 LDC r1, Irr2, xL LDC r2, Irr2, xL LD r1, Ir2 LD Ir1, r2 LDC r1, Irr2, xs LDC r2, Irr1, xs 6 7 8 9 A B C B L E H E X D E F LD R2,IR1 LD IR2,R1 LD R1,IM CALL DA1 6-10 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET Table 6-5. Opcode Quick Reference (Continued) OPCODE MAP LOWER NIBBLE (HEX) – U P P E R 0 1 2 3 4 5 N I B B L E 6 7 8 9 A B C H E X D E F LD r1,R2 LD r2,R1 DJNZ r1,RA JR cc,RA LD r1,IM JP cc,DA INC r1 8 LD r1,R2 9 LD r2,R1 A DJNZ r1,RA B JR cc,RA C LD r1,IM D JP cc,DA E INC r1 F NEXT ENTER EXIT WFI SB0 SB1 IDLE ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ www.DataSheet4U.com ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ STOP DI EI RET IRET RCF ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ SCF CCF NOP 6-11 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B CONDITION CODES The opcode of a conditional jump always contains a 4-bit field called the condition code (cc). This specifies under which conditions it is to execute the jump. For example, a conditional jump with the condition code for "equal" after a compare operation only jumps if the two operands are equal. Condition codes are listed in Table 6-6. The carry (C), zero (Z), sign (S), and overflow (V) flags are used to control the operation of conditional jump instructions. Table 6-6. Condition Codes Binary 0000 1000 0111 (note) Mnemonic F T C NC Z NZ PL MI OV NOV Description Always false Always true Carry No carry Zero Not zero Plus Minus Overflow No overflow Equal Not equal Greater than or equal Less than Greater than Less than or equal Unsigned greater than or equal Unsigned less than Unsigned greater than Unsigned less than or equal – – C=1 C=0 Z=1 Z=0 S=0 S=1 V=1 V=0 Z=1 Z=0 Flags Set 1111 (note) 0110 (note) 1110 (note) 1101 0101 0100 1100 www.DataSheet4U.com 0110 1110 1001 0001 1010 0010 1111 1011 0011 (note) (note) EQ NE GE LT GT LE (S XOR V) = 0 (S XOR V) = 1 (Z OR (S XOR V)) = 0 (Z OR (S XOR V)) = 1 C=0 C=1 (C = 0 AND Z = 0) = 1 (C OR Z) = 1 (note) UGE ULT UGT ULE 0111 (note) NOTES: 1. It indicates condition codes that are related to two different mnemonics but which test the same flag. For example, Z and EQ are both true if the zero flag (Z) is set, but after an ADD instruction, Z would probably be used; after a CP instruction, however, EQ would probably be used. 2. For operations involving unsigned numbers, the special condition codes UGE, ULT, UGT, and ULE must be used. 6-12 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTIONS This section contains detailed information and programming examples for each instruction in the SAM8 instruction set. Information is arranged in a consistent format for improved readability and for fast referencing. The following information is included in each instruction description: — Instruction name (mnemonic) — Full instruction name — Source/destination format of the instruction operand — Shorthand notation of the instruction's operation — Textual description of the instruction's effect — Specific flag settings affected by the instruction — Detailed description of the instruction's format, execution time, and addressing mode(s) — Programming example(s) explaining how to use the instruction www.DataSheet4U.com 6-13 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B ADC — Add with carry ADC Operation: dst,src dst ← dst + src + c The source operand, along with the setting of the carry flag, is added to the destination operand and the sum is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Two'scomplement addition is performed. In multiple precision arithmetic, this instruction permits the carry from the addition of low-order operands to be carried into the addition of high-order operands. Flags: C: Z: S: V: Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the result; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurs, that is, if both operands are of the same sign and the result is of the opposite sign; cleared otherwise. D: Always cleared to "0". H: Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result; cleared otherwise. Bytes opc www.DataSheet4U.com Format: Cycles 4 6 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Opcode (Hex) 12 13 14 15 16 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM dst | src 2 Examples: Given: R1 = 10H, R2 = 03H, C flag = "1", register 01H = 20H, register 02H = 03H, and register 03H = 0AH: ADC ADC ADC ADC ADC R1,R2 R1,@R2 01H,02H 01H,@02H 01H,#11H → → → → → R1 = 14H, R2 = 03H R1 = 1BH, R2 = 03H Register 01H = 24H, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 2BH, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 32H In the first example, destination register R1 contains the value 10H, the carry flag is set to "1", and the source working register R2 contains the value 03H. The statement "ADC R1,R2" adds 03H and the carry flag value ("1") to the destination value 10H, leaving 14H in register R1. 6-14 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET ADD ADD — Add dst,src dst ← dst + src The source operand is added to the destination operand and the sum is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Two's-complement addition is performed. Operation: Flags: C: Z: S: V: Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the result; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if both operands are of the same sign and the result is of the opposite sign; cleared otherwise. D: Always cleared to "0". H: Set if a carry from the low-order nibble occurred. Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc www.DataSheet4U.com Opcode (Hex) 02 03 04 05 06 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Examples: Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, register 01H = 21H, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH: ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD R1,R2 R1,@R2 01H,02H 01H,@02H 01H,#25H → → → → → R1 = 15H, R2 = 03H R1 = 1CH, R2 = 03H Register 01H = 24H, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 2BH, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 46H In the first example, destination working register R1 contains 12H and the source working register R2 contains 03H. The statement "ADD R1,R2" adds 03H to 12H, leaving the value 15H in register R1. 6-15 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B AND AND — Logical AND dst,src dst ← dst AND src The source operand is logically ANDed with the destination operand. The result is stored in the destination. The AND operation results in a "1" bit being stored whenever the corresponding bits in the two operands are both logic ones; otherwise a "0" bit value is stored. The contents of the source are unaffected. Operation: Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Always cleared to "0". Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Opcode (Hex) 52 53 54 55 56 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM www.DataSheet4U.com Examples: Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, register 01H = 21H, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH: AND AND AND AND AND R1,R2 R1,@R2 01H,02H 01H,@02H 01H,#25H → → → → → R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H Register 01H = 01H, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 00H, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 21H In the first example, destination working register R1 contains the value 12H and the source working register R2 contains 03H. The statement "AND R1,R2" logically ANDs the source operand 03H with the destination operand value 12H, leaving the value 02H in register R1. 6-16 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET BAND BAND BAND Operation: — Bit AND dst,src.b dst.b,src dst(0) ← dst(0) AND src(b) or dst(b) ← dst(b) AND src(0) The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically ANDed with the zero bit (LSB) of the destination (or source). The resultant bit is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Cleared to "0". Undefined. Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc www.DataSheet4U.com Cycles 6 6 Opcode (Hex) 67 67 Addr Mode dst src r0 Rb Rb r0 dst | b | 0 src dst 3 3 opc src | b | 1 NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length. Examples: Given: R1 = 07H and register 01H = 05H: BAND R1,01H.1 BAND 01H.1,R1 → → R1 = 06H, register 01H = 05H Register 01H = 05H, R1 = 07H In the first example, source register 01H contains the value 05H (00000101B) and destination working register R1 contains 07H (00000111B). The statement "BAND R1,01H.1" ANDs the bit 1 value of the source register ("0") with the bit 0 value of register R1 (destination), leaving the value 06H (00000110B) in register R1. 6-17 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B BCP — Bit Compare BCP Operation: dst,src.b dst(0) – src(b) The specified bit of the source is compared to (subtracted from) bit zero (LSB) of the destination. The zero flag is set if the bits are the same; otherwise it is cleared. The contents of both operands are unaffected by the comparison. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the two bits are the same; cleared otherwise. Cleared to "0". Undefined. Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc dst | b | 0 Cycles 6 Opcode (Hex) 17 Addr Mode dst src r0 Rb src 3 NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length. www.DataSheet4U.com Example: Given: R1 = 07H and register 01H = 01H: BCP R1,01H.1 → R1 = 07H, register 01H = 01H If destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B) and the source register 01H contains the value 01H (00000001B), the statement "BCP R1,01H.1" compares bit one of the source register (01H) and bit zero of the destination register (R1). Because the bit values are not identical, the zero flag bit (Z) is cleared in the FLAGS register (0D5H). 6-18 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET BITC BITC — Bit Complement dst.b dst(b) ← NOT dst(b) This instruction complements the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bits in the destination. Operation: Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Cleared to "0". Undefined. Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc dst | b | 0 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 57 Addr Mode dst rb 2 NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length. www.DataSheet4U.com Example: Given: R1 = 07H BITC R1.1 → R1 = 05H If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITC R1.1" complements bit one of the destination and leaves the value 05H (00000101B) in register R1. Because the result of the complement is not "0", the zero flag (Z) in the FLAGS register (0D5H) is cleared. 6-19 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B BITR — Bit Reset BITR Operation: dst.b dst(b) ← 0 The BITR instruction clears the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bits in the destination. Flags: Format: Bytes opc dst | b | 0 No flags are affected. Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 77 Addr Mode dst rb 2 NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length. Example: Given: R1 = 07H: BITR R1.1 → R1 = 05H www.DataSheet4U.com If the value of working register R1 is 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITR R1.1" clears bit one of the destination register R1, leaving the value 05H (00000101B). 6-20 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET BITS — Bit Set BITS Operation: dst.b dst(b) ← 1 The BITS instruction sets the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bits in the destination. Flags: Format: Bytes opc dst | b | 1 No flags are affected. Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 77 Addr Mode dst rb 2 NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length. Example: Given: R1 = 07H: BITS R1.3 → R1 = 0FH www.DataSheet4U.com If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITS R1.3" sets bit three of the destination register R1 to "1", leaving the value 0FH (00001111B). 6-21 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B BOR — Bit OR BOR BOR Operation: dst,src.b dst.b,src dst(0) ← dst(0) OR src(b) or dst(b) ← dst(b) OR src(0) The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically ORed with bit zero (LSB) of the destination (or the source). The resulting bit value is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Cleared to "0". Undefined. Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc www.DataSheet4U.com Cycles 6 6 Opcode (Hex) 07 07 Addr Mode dst src r0 Rb Rb r0 dst | b | 0 src dst 3 3 opc src | b | 1 NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit. Examples: Given: R1 = 07H and register 01H = 03H: BOR BOR R1, 01H.1 01H.2, R1 → → R1 = 07H, register 01H = 03H Register 01H = 07H, R1 = 07H In the first example, destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B) and source register 01H the value 03H (00000011B). The statement "BOR R1,01H.1" logically ORs bit one of register 01H (source) with bit zero of R1 (destination). This leaves the same value (07H) in working register R1. In the second example, destination register 01H contains the value 03H (00000011B) and the source working register R1 the value 07H (00000111B). The statement "BOR 01H.2,R1" logically ORs bit two of register 01H (destination) with bit zero of R1 (source). This leaves the value 07H in register 01H. 6-22 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET BTJRF BTJRF Operation: — Bit Test, Jump Relative on False dst,src.b If src(b) is a "0", then PC ← PC + dst The specified bit within the source operand is tested. If it is a "0", the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC; otherwise, the instruction following the BTJRF instruction is executed. Flags: Format: No flags are affected. Bytes (Note 1) Cycles 10 Opcode (Hex) 37 Addr Mode dst src RA rb opc src | b | 0 dst 3 NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the source address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length. Example: Given: R1 = 07H: BTJRF SKIP,R1.3 → PC jumps to SKIP location www.DataSheet4U.com If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BTJRF SKIP,R1.3" tests bit 3. Because it is "0", the relative address is added to the PC and the PC jumps to the memory location pointed to by the SKIP. (Remember that the memory location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to – 128.) 6-23 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B BTJRT — Bit Test, Jump Relative on True BTJRT Operation: dst,src.b If src(b) is a "1", then PC ← PC + dst The specified bit within the source operand is tested. If it is a "1", the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC; otherwise, the instruction following the BTJRT instruction is executed. Flags: Format: Bytes (Note 1) No flags are affected. Cycles 10 Opcode (Hex) 37 Addr Mode dst src RA rb opc src | b | 1 dst 3 NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the source address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length. Example: Given: R1 = 07H: BTJRT SKIP,R1.1 www.DataSheet4U.com If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BTJRT SKIP,R1.1" tests bit one in the source register (R1). Because it is a "1", the relative address is added to the PC and the PC jumps to the memory location pointed to by the SKIP. (Remember that the memory location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to – 128.) 6-24 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET BXOR — Bit XOR BXOR BXOR Operation: dst,src.b dst.b,src dst(0) ← dst(0) XOR src(b) or dst(b) ← dst(b) XOR src(0) The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically exclusive-ORed with bit zero (LSB) of the destination (or source). The result bit is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Cleared to "0". Undefined. Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc www.DataSheet4U.com Cycles 6 6 Opcode (Hex) 27 27 Addr Mode dst src r0 Rb Rb r0 dst | b | 0 src dst 3 3 opc src | b | 1 NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length. Examples: Given: R1 = 07H (00000111B) and register 01H = 03H (00000011B): BXOR R1,01H.1 BXOR 01H.2,R1 → → R1 = 06H, register 01H = 03H Register 01H = 07H, R1 = 07H In the first example, destination working register R1 has the value 07H (00000111B) and source register 01H has the value 03H (00000011B). The statement "BXOR R1,01H.1" exclusive-ORs bit one of register 01H (source) with bit zero of R1 (destination). The result bit value is stored in bit zero of R1, changing its value from 07H to 06H. The value of source register 01H is unaffected. 6-25 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B CALL — Call Procedure CALL Operation: dst SP @SP SP @SP PC ← ← ← ← ← SP – 1 PCL SP –1 PCH dst The current contents of the program counter are pushed onto the top of the stack. The program counter value used is the address of the first instruction following the CALL instruction. The specified destination address is then loaded into the program counter and points to the first instruction of a procedure. At the end of the procedure the return instruction (RET) can be used to return to the original program flow. RET pops the top of the stack back into the program counter. Flags: Format: Bytes opc opc opc dst dst dst 3 2 2 Cycles 14 12 14 Opcode (Hex) F6 F4 D4 Addr Mode dst DA IRR IA No flags are affected. www.DataSheet4U.com Examples: Given: R0 = 35H, R1 = 21H, PC = 1A47H, and SP = 0002H: CALL 3521H → SP = 0000H (Memory locations 0000H = 1AH, 0001H = 4AH, where 4AH is the address that follows the instruction.) CALL CALL @RR0 → #40H → SP = 0000H (0000H = 1AH, 0001H = 49H) SP = 0000H (0000H = 1AH, 0001H = 49H) In the first example, if the program counter value is 1A47H and the stack pointer contains the value 0002H, the statement "CALL 3521H" pushes the current PC value onto the top of the stack. The stack pointer now points to memory location 0000H. The PC is then loaded with the value 3521H, the address of the first instruction in the program sequence to be executed. If the contents of the program counter and stack pointer are the same as in the first example, the statement "CALL @RR0" produces the same result except that the 49H is stored in stack location 0001H (because the two-byte instruction format was used). The PC is then loaded with the value 3521H, the address of the first instruction in the program sequence to be executed. Assuming that the contents of the program counter and stack pointer are the same as in the first example, if program address 0040H contains 35H and program address 0041H contains 21H, the statement "CALL #40H" produces the same result as in the second example. 6-26 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET CCF — Complement Carry Flag CCF Operation: C ← NOT C The carry flag (C) is complemented. If C = "1", the value of the carry flag is changed to logic zero; if C = "0", the value of the carry flag is changed to logic one. Flags: C: Complemented. No other flags are affected. Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) EF Example: Given: The carry flag = "0": CCF If the carry flag = "0", the CCF instruction complements it in the FLAGS register (0D5H), changing its value from logic zero to logic one. www.DataSheet4U.com 6-27 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B CLR — Clear CLR Operation: dst dst ← "0" The destination location is cleared to "0". Flags: Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) B0 B1 Addr Mode dst R IR No flags are affected. Examples: Given: Register 00H = 4FH, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 5EH: CLR CLR 00H → Register 00H = 00H Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 00H @01H → www.DataSheet4U.com In Register (R) addressing mode, the statement "CLR 00H" clears the destination register 00H value to 00H. In the second example, the statement "CLR @01H" uses Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode to clear the 02H register value to 00H. 6-28 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET COM — Complement COM Operation: dst dst ← NOT dst The contents of the destination location are complemented (one's complement); all "1s" are changed to "0s", and vice-versa. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Always reset to "0". Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) 60 61 Addr Mode dst R IR Examples: www.DataSheet4U.com Given: R1 = 07H and register 07H = 0F1H: COM COM R1 @R1 → → R1 = 0F8H R1 = 07H, register 07H = 0EH In the first example, destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B). The statement "COM R1" complements all the bits in R1: all logic ones are changed to logic zeros, and vice-versa, leaving the value 0F8H (11111000B). In the second example, Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode is used to complement the value of destination register 07H (11110001B), leaving the new value 0EH (00001110B). 6-29 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B CP — Compare CP Operation: dst,src dst – src The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand, and the appropriate flags are set accordingly. The contents of both operands are unaffected by the comparison. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Set if a "borrow" occurred (src > dst); cleared otherwise. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise. Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Opcode (Hex) A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM www.DataSheet4U.com Examples: 1. Given: R1 = 02H and R2 = 03H: CP R1,R2 → Set the C and S flags Destination working register R1 contains the value 02H and source register R2 contains the value 03H. The statement "CP R1,R2" subtracts the R2 value (source/subtrahend) from the R1 value (destination/minuend). Because a "borrow" occurs and the difference is negative, C and S are "1". 2. Given: R1 = 05H and R2 = 0AH: CP JP INC LD R1,R2 UGE,SKIP R1 R3,R1 SKIP In this example, destination working register R1 contains the value 05H which is less than the contents of the source working register R2 (0AH). The statement "CP R1,R2" generates C = "1" and the JP instruction does not jump to the SKIP location. After the statement "LD R3,R1" executes, the value 06H remains in working register R3. 6-30 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET CPIJE — Compare, Increment, and Jump on Equal CPIJE Operation: dst,src,RA If dst – src = "0", PC ← PC + RA Ir ← Ir + 1 The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand. If the result is "0", the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the program counter. Otherwise, the instruction immediately following the CPIJE instruction is executed. In either case, the source pointer is incremented by one before the next instruction is executed. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src dst RA 3 Cycles 12 Opcode (Hex) C2 Addr Mode dst src r Ir No flags are affected. NOTE: Execution time is 18 cycles if the jump is taken or 16 cycles if it is not taken. Example: www.DataSheet4U.com Given: R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H, and register 03H = 02H: CPIJE R1,@R2,SKIP → R2 = 04H, PC jumps to SKIP location In this example, working register R1 contains the value 02H, working register R2 the value 03H, and register 03 contains 02H. The statement "CPIJE R1,@R2,SKIP" compares the @R2 value 02H (00000010B) to 02H (00000010B). Because the result of the comparison is equal, the relative address is added to the PC and the PC then jumps to the memory location pointed to by SKIP. The source register (R2) is incremented by one, leaving a value of 04H. (Remember that the memory location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to – 128.) 6-31 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B CPIJNE — Compare, Increment, and Jump on Non-Equal CPIJNE Operation: dst,src,RA If dst – src "0", PC ← PC + RA Ir ← Ir + 1 The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand. If the result is not "0", the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the program counter; otherwise the instruction following the CPIJNE instruction is executed. In either case the source pointer is incremented by one before the next instruction. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src dst RA 3 Cycles 12 Opcode (Hex) D2 Addr Mode dst src r Ir No flags are affected. NOTE: Execution time is 18 cycles if the jump is taken or 16 cycles if it is not taken. Example: www.DataSheet4U.com Given: R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H, and register 03H = 04H: CPIJNE R1,@R2,SKIP → R2 = 04H, PC jumps to SKIP location Working register R1 contains the value 02H, working register R2 (the source pointer) the value 03H, and general register 03 the value 04H. The statement "CPIJNE R1,@R2,SKIP" subtracts 04H (00000100B) from 02H (00000010B). Because the result of the comparison is non-equal, the relative address is added to the PC and the PC then jumps to the memory location pointed to by SKIP. The source pointer register (R2) is also incremented by one, leaving a value of 04H. (Remember that the memory location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to – 128.) 6-32 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET DA — Decimal Adjust DA Operation: dst dst ← DA dst The destination operand is adjusted to form two 4-bit BCD digits following an addition or subtraction operation. For addition (ADD, ADC) or subtraction (SUB, SBC), the following table indicates the operation performed. (The operation is undefined if the destination operand was not the result of a valid addition or subtraction of BCD digits): Instruction Carry Before DA 0 0 0 ADD ADC 0 0 0 1 1 1 www.DataSheet4U.com Bits 4–7 Value (Hex) 0–9 0–8 0–9 A–F 9–F A–F 0–2 0–2 0–3 0–9 0–8 7–F 6–F H Flag Before DA 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 Bits 0–3 Value (Hex) 0–9 A–F 0–3 0–9 A–F 0–3 0–9 A–F 0–3 0–9 6–F 0–9 6–F Number Added to Byte 00 06 06 60 66 66 60 66 66 00 = – 00 FA = – 06 A0 = – 60 9A = – 66 Carry After DA 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 SUB SBC 0 1 1 Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Set if there was a carry from the most significant bit; cleared otherwise (see table). Set if result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Undefined. Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) 40 41 Addr Mode dst R IR 6-33 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B DA — Decimal Adjust DA Example: (Continued) Given: Working register R0 contains the value 15 (BCD), working register R1 contains 27 (BCD), and address 27H contains 46 (BCD): ADD DA R1,R0 R1 ; ; C ← "0", H ← "0", Bits 4–7 = 3, bits 0–3 = C, R1 ← 3CH R1 ← 3CH + 06 If addition is performed using the BCD values 15 and 27, the result should be 42. The sum is incorrect, however, when the binary representations are added in the destination location using standard binary arithmetic: 0001 + 0010 0011 0101 0111 1100 = 15 27 3CH The DA instruction adjusts this result so that the correct BCD representation is obtained: 0011 + 0000 0100 1100 0110 0010 = 42 www.DataSheet4U.com Assuming the same values given above, the statements SUB DA 27H,R0 ; @R1 ; C ← "0", H ← "0", Bits 4–7 = 3, bits 0–3 = 1 @R1 ← 31–0 leave the value 31 (BCD) in address 27H (@R1). 6-34 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET DEC — Decrement DEC Operation: dst dst ← dst – 1 The contents of the destination operand are decremented by one. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise. Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) 00 01 Addr Mode dst R IR Examples: www.DataSheet4U.com Given: R1 = 03H and register 03H = 10H: DEC DEC R1 @R1 → → R1 = 02H Register 03H = 0FH In the first example, if working register R1 contains the value 03H, the statement "DEC R1" decrements the hexadecimal value by one, leaving the value 02H. In the second example, the statement "DEC @R1" decrements the value 10H contained in the destination register 03H by one, leaving the value 0FH. 6-35 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B DECW — Decrement Word DECW Operation: dst dst ← dst – 1 The contents of the destination location (which must be an even address) and the operand following that location are treated as a single 16-bit value that is decremented by one. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise. Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 8 8 Opcode (Hex) 80 81 Addr Mode dst RR IR Examples: www.DataSheet4U.com Given: R0 = 12H, R1 = 34H, R2 = 30H, register 30H = 0FH, and register 31H = 21H: DECW RR0 DECW @R2 → → R0 = 12H, R1 = 33H Register 30H = 0FH, register 31H = 20H In the first example, destination register R0 contains the value 12H and register R1 the value 34H. The statement "DECW RR0" addresses R0 and the following operand R1 as a 16-bit word and decrements the value of R1 by one, leaving the value 33H. NOTE: A system malfunction may occur if you use a Zero flag (FLAGS.6) result together with a DECW instruction. To avoid this problem, we recommend that you use DECW as shown in the following example: LOOP: DECW RR0 LD OR JR R2,R1 R2,R0 NZ,LOOP 6-36 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET DI — Disable Interrupts DI Operation: SYM (0) ← 0 Bit zero of the system mode control register, SYM.0, is cleared to "0", globally disabling all interrupt processing. Interrupt requests will continue to set their respective interrupt pending bits, but the CPU will not service them while interrupt processing is disabled. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 8F No flags are affected. Example: Given: SYM = 01H: DI If the value of the SYM register is 01H, the statement "DI" leaves the new value 00H in the register and clears SYM.0 to "0", disabling interrupt processing. www.DataSheet4U.com Before changing IMR, interrupt pending and interrupt source control register, be sure DI state. 6-37 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B DIV — Divide (Unsigned) DIV Operation: dst,src dst ÷ src dst (UPPER) ← REMAINDER dst (LOWER) ← QUOTIENT The destination operand (16 bits) is divided by the source operand (8 bits). The quotient (8 bits) is stored in the lower half of the destination. The remainder (8 bits) is stored in the upper half of the destination. When the quotient is ≥ 28, the numbers stored in the upper and lower halves of the destination for quotient and remainder are incorrect. Both operands are treated as unsigned integers. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Set if the V flag is set and quotient is between 28 and 29 –1; cleared otherwise. Set if divisor or quotient = "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if MSB of quotient = "1"; cleared otherwise. Set if quotient is ≥ 28 or if divisor = "0"; cleared otherwise. Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes www.DataSheet4U.com Cycles 26/10 26/10 26/10 Opcode (Hex) 94 95 96 Addr Mode dst src RR RR RR R IR IM opc src dst 3 NOTE: Execution takes 10 cycles if the divide-by-zero is attempted; otherwise it takes 26 cycles. Examples: Given: R0 = 10H, R1 = 03H, R2 = 40H, register 40H = 80H: DIV DIV DIV RR0,R2 RR0,@R2 RR0,#20H → → → R0 = 03H, R1 = 40H R0 = 03H, R1 = 20H R0 = 03H, R1 = 80H In the first example, destination working register pair RR0 contains the values 10H (R0) and 03H (R1), and register R2 contains the value 40H. The statement "DIV RR0,R2" divides the 16-bit RR0 value by the 8-bit value of the R2 (source) register. After the DIV instruction, R0 contains the value 03H and R1 contains 40H. The 8-bit remainder is stored in the upper half of the destination register RR0 (R0) and the quotient in the lower half (R1). 6-38 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET DJNZ — Decrement and Jump if Non-Zero DJNZ Operation: r,dst r←r–1 If r ≠ 0, PC ← PC + dst The working register being used as a counter is decremented. If the contents of the register are not logic zero after decrementing, the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC. The range of the relative address is +127 to –128, and the original value of the PC is taken to be the address of the instruction byte following the DJNZ statement. NOTE: In case of using DJNZ instruction, the working register being used as a counter should be set at the one of location 0C0H to 0CFH with SRP, SRP0, or SRP1 instruction. Flags: Format: No flags are affected. Bytes r | opc dst 2 Cycles 8 (jump taken) 8 (no jump) Opcode (Hex) rA r = 0 to F Addr Mode dst RA www.DataSheet4U.com Example: Given: R1 = 02H and LOOP is the label of a relative address: SRP DJNZ #0C0H R1,LOOP DJNZ is typically used to control a "loop" of instructions. In many cases, a label is used as the destination operand instead of a numeric relative address value. In the example, working register R1 contains the value 02H, and LOOP is the label for a relative address. The statement "DJNZ R1, LOOP" decrements register R1 by one, leaving the value 01H. Because the contents of R1 after the decrement are non-zero, the jump is taken to the relative address specified by the LOOP label. 6-39 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B EI — Enable Interrupts EI Operation: SYM (0) ← 1 An EI instruction sets bit zero of the system mode register, SYM.0 to "1". This allows interrupts to be serviced as they occur (assuming they have highest priority). If an interrupt's pending bit was set while interrupt processing was disabled (by executing a DI instruction), it will be serviced when you execute the EI instruction. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 9F No flags are affected. Example: Given: SYM = 00H: EI If the SYM register contains the value 00H, that is, if interrupts are currently disabled, the statement "EI" sets the SYM register to 01H, enabling all interrupts. (SYM.0 is the enable bit for global interrupt processing.) www.DataSheet4U.com 6-40 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET ENTER — Enter ENTER Operation: SP @SP IP PC IP ← ← ← ← ← SP – 2 IP PC @IP IP + 2 This instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The contents of the instruction pointer are pushed to the stack. The program counter (PC) value is then written to the instruction pointer. The program memory word that is pointed to by the instruction pointer is loaded into the PC, and the instruction pointer is incremented by two. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 14 Opcode (Hex) 1F No flags are affected. Example: www.DataSheet4U.com The diagram below shows one example of how to use an ENTER statement. Before Address IP 0050 Address PC 0040 40 41 42 43 Enter Address H Address L Address H Data 1F 01 10 PC 0110 Data Address IP 0043 After Data Address 40 41 42 43 Enter Address H Address L Address H Data 1F 01 10 SP 0022 SP 0020 22 Data Stack Memory 20 21 22 IPH IPL Data Stack 00 50 110 Routine Memory 6-41 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B EXIT — Exit EXIT Operation: IP SP PC IP ← ← ← ← @SP SP + 2 @IP IP + 2 This instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The stack value is popped and loaded into the instruction pointer. The program memory word that is pointed to by the instruction pointer is then loaded into the program counter, and the instruction pointer is incremented by two. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 14 (internal stack) 16 (internal stack) Opcode (Hex) 2F No flags are affected. Example: www.DataSheet4U.com The diagram below shows one example of how to use an EXIT statement. Before Address IP 0050 Address PC 0040 50 51 SP 0022 140 20 21 22 IPH IPL Data Stack 00 50 Exit 2F PCL old PCH 60 00 SP 0022 Data PC 0060 Data Address IP 0052 After Data Address 60 Main Data Memory 22 Data Stack Memory 6-42 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET IDLE — Idle Operation IDLE Operation: The IDLE instruction stops the CPU clock while allowing system clock oscillation to continue. Idle mode can be released by an interrupt request (IRQ) or an external reset operation. In application programs, a IDLE instruction must be immediately followed by at least three NOP instructions. This ensures an adeguate time interval for the clock to stabilize before the next instruction is executed. If three or more NOP instructons are not used after IDLE instruction, leakage current could be flown because of the floating state in the internal bus. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 6F Addr Mode dst src – – No flags are affected. Example: The instruction IDLE NOP NOP NOP ; stops the CPU clock but not the system clock www.DataSheet4U.com 6-43 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B INC — Increment INC Operation: dst dst ← dst + 1 The contents of the destination operand are incremented by one. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise. Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes dst | opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) rE r = 0 to F opc dst 2 4 4 www.DataSheet4U.com Addr Mode dst r 20 21 R IR Examples: Given: R0 = 1BH, register 00H = 0CH, and register 1BH = 0FH: INC INC INC R0 00H @R0 → → → R0 = 1CH Register 00H = 0DH R0 = 1BH, register 01H = 10H In the first example, if destination working register R0 contains the value 1BH, the statement "INC R0" leaves the value 1CH in that same register. The next example shows the effect an INC instruction has on register 00H, assuming that it contains the value 0CH. In the third example, INC is used in Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode to increment the value of register 1BH from 0FH to 10H. 6-44 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET INCW — Increment Word INCW Operation: dst dst ← dst + 1 The contents of the destination (which must be an even address) and the byte following that location are treated as a single 16-bit value that is incremented by one. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise. Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 8 8 Opcode (Hex) A0 A1 Addr Mode dst RR IR Examples: www.DataSheet4U.com Given: R0 = 1AH, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 0FH, and register 03H = 0FFH: INCW RR0 INCW @R1 → → R0 = 1AH, R1 = 03H Register 02H = 10H, register 03H = 00H In the first example, the working register pair RR0 contains the value 1AH in register R0 and 02H in register R1. The statement "INCW RR0" increments the 16-bit destination by one, leaving the value 03H in register R1. In the second example, the statement "INCW @R1" uses Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode to increment the contents of general register 03H from 0FFH to 00H and register 02H from 0FH to 10H. NOTE: A system malfunction may occur if you use a Zero (Z) flag (FLAGS.6) result together with an INCW instruction. To avoid this problem, we recommend that you use INCW as shown in the following example: LOOP: INCW LD OR JR RR0 R2,R1 R2,R0 NZ,LOOP 6-45 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B IRET — Interrupt Return IRET Operation: IRET (Normal) FLAGS ← @SP SP ← SP + 1 PC ← @SP SP ← SP + 2 SYM(0) ← 1 IRET (Fast) PC ↔ IP FLAGS ← FLAGS' FIS ← 0 This instruction is used at the end of an interrupt service routine. It restores the flag register and the program counter. It also re-enables global interrupts. A "normal IRET" is executed only if the fast interrupt status bit (FIS, bit one of the FLAGS register, 0D5H) is cleared (= "0"). If a fast interrupt occurred, IRET clears the FIS bit that was set at the beginning of the service routine. Flags: Format: IRET (Normal) opc Bytes 1 Cycles 10 (internal stack) 12 (internal stack) IRET (Fast) opc Bytes 1 Cycles 6 Opcode (Hex) BF Opcode (Hex) BF All flags are restored to their original settings (that is, the settings before the interrupt occurred). www.DataSheet4U.com Example: In the figure below, the instruction pointer is initially loaded with 100H in the main program before interrupts are enabled. When an interrupt occurs, the program counter and instruction pointer are swapped. This causes the PC to jump to address 100H and the IP to keep the return address. The last instruction in the service routine normally is a jump to IRET at address FFH. This causes the instruction pointer to be loaded with 100H "again" and the program counter to jump back to the main program. Now, the next interrupt can occur and the IP is still correct at 100H. 0H FFH 100H IRET Interrupt Service Routine JP to FFH FFFFH NOTE: In the fast interrupt example above, if the last instruction is not a jump to IRET, you must pay attention to the order of the last two instructions. The IRET cannot be immediately proceeded by a clearing of the interrupt status (as with a reset of the IPR register). 6-46 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET JP — Jump JP JP Operation: cc,dst dst (Conditional) (Unconditional) If cc is true, PC ← dst The conditional JUMP instruction transfers program control to the destination address if the condition specified by the condition code (cc) is true; otherwise, the instruction following the JP instruction is executed. The unconditional JP simply replaces the contents of the PC with the contents of the specified register pair. Control then passes to the statement addressed by the PC. Flags: Format: (1) No flags are affected. Bytes (2) Cycles 8 Opcode (Hex) ccD cc = 0 to F Addr Mode dst DA cc | opc dst 3 opc www.DataSheet4U.com dst 2 8 30 IRR NOTES: 1. The 3-byte format is used for a conditional jump and the 2-byte format for an unconditional jump. 2. In the first byte of the three-byte instruction format (conditional jump), the condition code and the opcode are both four bits. Examples: Given: The carry flag (C) = "1", register 00 = 01H, and register 01 = 20H: JP JP C,LABEL_W @00H → → LABEL_W = 1000H, PC = 1000H PC = 0120H The first example shows a conditional JP. Assuming that the carry flag is set to "1", the statement "JP C,LABEL_W" replaces the contents of the PC with the value 1000H and transfers control to that location. Had the carry flag not been set, control would then have passed to the statement immediately following the JP instruction. The second example shows an unconditional JP. The statement "JP @00" replaces the contents of the PC with the contents of the register pair 00H and 01H, leaving the value 0120H. 6-47 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B JR — Jump Relative JR Operation: cc,dst If cc is true, PC ← PC + dst If the condition specified by the condition code (cc) is true, the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the program counter; otherwise, the instruction following the JR instruction is executed. (See list of condition codes). The range of the relative address is +127, –128, and the original value of the program counter is taken to be the address of the first instruction byte following the JR statement. Flags: Format: Bytes (1) No flags are affected. Cycles 6 Opcode (Hex) ccB cc = 0 to F Addr Mode dst RA cc | opc dst 2 NOTE: In the first byte of the two-byte instruction format, the condition code and the opcode are each four bits. www.DataSheet4U.com Example: Given: The carry flag = "1" and LABEL_X = 1FF7H: JR C,LABEL_X → PC = 1FF7H If the carry flag is set (that is, if the condition code is true), the statement "JR C,LABEL_X" will pass control to the statement whose address is now in the PC. Otherwise, the program instruction following the JR would be executed. 6-48 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET LD — Load LD Operation: dst,src dst ← src The contents of the source are loaded into the destination. The source's contents are unaffected. Flags: Format: Bytes dst | opc src 2 Cycles 4 4 src | opc dst 2 4 Opcode (Hex) rC r8 r9 r = 0 to F opc dst | src 2 4 4 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 6 opc opc opc src dst | src src | dst dst x x 3 3 3 6 6 6 C7 D7 E4 E5 E6 D6 F5 87 97 r Ir R R R IR IR r x [r] lr r R IR IM IM R x [r] r Addr Mode dst src r r R IM R r No flags are affected. www.DataSheet4U.com 6-49 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B LD — Load LD Examples: (Continued) Given: R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH, register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 20H, register 02H = 02H, LOOP = 30H, and register 3AH = 0FFH: LD LD LD LD LD LD LD LD LD LD LD LD R0,#10H R0,01H 01H,R0 R1,@R0 @R0,R1 00H,01H 02H,@00H 00H,#0AH @00H,#10H @00H,02H → → → → → → → → → → R0 = 10H R0 = 20H, register 01H = 20H Register 01H = 01H, R0 = 01H R1 = 20H, R0 = 01H R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH, register 01H = 0AH Register 00H = 20H, register 01H = 20H Register 02H = 20H, register 00H = 01H Register 00H = 0AH Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 10H Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 02, register 02H = 02H R0 = 0FFH, R1 = 0AH Register 31H = 0AH, R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH R0,#LOOP[R1] → #LOOP[R0],R1 → www.DataSheet4U.com 6-50 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET LDB — Load Bit LDB LDB Operation: dst,src.b dst.b,src dst(0) ← src(b) or dst(b) ← src(0) The specified bit of the source is loaded into bit zero (LSB) of the destination, or bit zero of the source is loaded into the specified bit of the destination. No other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected. Flags: Format: Bytes opc opc dst | b | 0 No flags are affected. Cycles 6 6 Opcode (Hex) 47 47 Addr Mode dst src r0 Rb Rb r0 src dst 3 3 src | b | 1 www.DataSheet4U.com NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length. Examples: Given: R0 = 06H and general register 00H = 05H: LDB LDB R0,00H.2 00H.0,R0 → → R0 = 07H, register 00H = 05H R0 = 06H, register 00H = 04H In the first example, destination working register R0 contains the value 06H and the source general register 00H the value 05H. The statement "LD R0,00H.2" loads the bit two value of the 00H register into bit zero of the R0 register, leaving the value 07H in register R0. In the second example, 00H is the destination register. The statement "LD 00H.0,R0" loads bit zero of register R0 to the specified bit (bit zero) of the destination register, leaving 04H in general register 00H. 6-51 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B LDC/LDE — Load Memory LDC/LDE Operation: dst,src dst ← src This instruction loads a byte from program or data memory into a working register or vice-versa. The source values are unaffected. LDC refers to program memory and LDE to data memory. The assembler makes 'Irr' or 'rr' values an even number for program memory and odd an odd number for data memory. Flags: Format: Bytes 1. 2. 3. 4. www.DataSheet4U.com No flags are affected. Cycles 10 10 12 12 14 Opcode (Hex) C3 D3 E7 F7 A7 Addr Mode dst src r Irr r XS [rr] r Irr r XS [rr] r XL [rr] opc opc opc opc opc opc opc opc opc opc dst | src src | dst dst | src src | dst dst | src 2 2 XS XS XLL XLL DAL DAL DAL DAL XLH XLH DAH DAH DAH DAH 3 3 4 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. src | dst 4 14 B7 XL [rr] r dst | 0000 4 14 A7 r DA src | 0000 4 14 B7 DA r dst | 0001 4 14 A7 r DA src | 0001 4 14 B7 DA r NOTES: 1. The source (src) or working register pair [rr] for formats 5 and 6 cannot use register pair 0–1. 2. For formats 3 and 4, the destination address 'XS [rr]' and the source address 'XS [rr]' are each one byte. 3. For formats 5 and 6, the destination address 'XL [rr] and the source address 'XL [rr]' are each two bytes. 4. The DA and r source values for formats 7 and 8 are used to address program memory; the second set of values, used in formats 9 and 10, are used to address data memory. 6-52 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET LDC/LDE — Load Memory LDC/LDE Examples: (Continued) Given: R0 = 11H, R1 = 34H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H; Program memory locations 0103H = 4FH, 0104H = 1A, 0105H = 6DH, and 1104H = 88H. External data memory locations 0103H = 5FH, 0104H = 2AH, 0105H = 7DH, and 1104H = 98H: LDC LDE R0,@RR2 R0,@RR2 ; R0 ← contents of program memory location 0104H ; R0 = 1AH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H ; R0 ← contents of external data memory location 0104H ; R0 = 2AH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H ; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory ; location 0104H (RR2), ; working registers R0, R2, R3 → no change ; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory ; location 0104H (RR2), ; working registers R0, R2, R3 → no change ; R0 ← contents of program memory location 0105H ; (01H + RR2), ; R0 = 6DH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H ; R0 ← contents of external data memory location 0105H ; (01H + RR2), R0 = 7DH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H ; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location ; 0105H (01H + 0104H) ; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory ; location 0105H (01H + 0104H) LDC (note) @RR2,R0 LDE @RR2,R0 LDC R0,#01H[RR2] LDE www.DataSheet4U.com R0,#01H[RR2] LDC (note) #01H[RR2],R0 LDE LDC LDE LDC LDE #01H[RR2],R0 R0,#1000H[RR2] ; R0 ← contents of program memory location 1104H ; (1000H + 0104H), R0 = 88H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H R0,#1000H[RR2] ; R0 ← contents of external data memory location 1104H ; (1000H + 0104H), R0 = 98H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H R0,1104H R0,1104H ; R0 ← contents of program memory location 1104H, R0 = 88H ; R0 ← contents of external data memory location 1104H, ; R0 = 98H ; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location ; 1105H, (1105H) ← 11H ; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory ; location 1105H, (1105H) ← 11H LDC (note) 1105H,R0 LDE 1105H,R0 NOTE: These instructions are not supported by masked ROM type devices. 6-53 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B LDCD/LDED — Load Memory and Decrement LDCD/LDED Operation: dst,src dst ← src rr ← rr – 1 These instructions are used for user stacks or block transfers of data from program or data memory to the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair. The contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The memory address is then decremented. The contents of the source are unaffected. LDCD references program memory and LDED references external data memory. The assembler makes 'Irr' an even number for program memory and an odd number for data memory. Flags: Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 10 Opcode (Hex) E2 Addr Mode dst src r Irr No flags are affected. Examples: www.DataSheet4U.com Given: R6 = 10H, R7 = 33H, R8 = 12H, program memory location 1033H = 0CDH, and external data memory location 1033H = 0DDH: LDCD R8,@RR6 ; 0CDH (contents of program memory location 1033H) is loaded ; into R8 and RR6 is decremented by one ; R8 = 0CDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 32H (RR6 ← RR6 – 1) LDED R8,@RR6 ; 0DDH (contents of data memory location 1033H) is loaded ; into R8 and RR6 is decremented by one (RR6 ← RR6 – 1) ; R8 = 0DDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 32H 6-54 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET LDCI/LDEI — Load Memory and Increment LDCI/LDEI Operation: dst,src dst ← src rr ← rr + 1 These instructions are used for user stacks or block transfers of data from program or data memory to the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair. The contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The memory address is then incremented automatically. The contents of the source are unaffected. LDCI refers to program memory and LDEI refers to external data memory. The assembler makes 'Irr' even for program memory and odd for data memory. Flags: Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 10 Opcode (Hex) E3 Addr Mode dst src r Irr No flags are affected. Examples: www.DataSheet4U.com Given: R6 = 10H, R7 = 33H, R8 = 12H, program memory locations 1033H = 0CDH and 1034H = 0C5H; external data memory locations 1033H = 0DDH and 1034H = 0D5H: LDCI R8,@RR6 ; 0CDH (contents of program memory location 1033H) is loaded ; into R8 and RR6 is incremented by one (RR6 ← RR6 + 1) ; R8 = 0CDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 34H LDEI R8,@RR6 ; 0DDH (contents of data memory location 1033H) is loaded ; into R8 and RR6 is incremented by one (RR6 ← RR6 + 1) ; R8 = 0DDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 34H 6-55 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B LDCPD/LDEPD — Load Memory with Pre-Decrement LDCPD/ LDEPD Operation: dst,src rr ← rr – 1 dst ← src These instructions are used for block transfers of data from program or data memory from the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair and is first decremented. The contents of the source location are then loaded into the destination location. The contents of the source are unaffected. LDCPD refers to program memory and LDEPD refers to external data memory. The assembler makes 'Irr' an even number for program memory and an odd number for external data memory. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src | dst 2 Cycles 14 Opcode (Hex) F2 Addr Mode dst src Irr r No flags are affected. www.DataSheet4U.com Examples: Given: R0 = 77H, R6 = 30H, and R7 = 00H: LDCPD @RR6,R0 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; (RR6 ← RR6 – 1) 77H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location 2FFFH (3000H – 1H) R0 = 77H, R6 = 2FH, R7 = 0FFH (RR6 ← RR6 – 1) 77H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory location 2FFFH (3000H – 1H) R0 = 77H, R6 = 2FH, R7 = 0FFH LDEPD @RR6,R0 6-56 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET LDCPI/LDEPI — Load Memory with Pre-Increment LDCPI/ LDEPI Operation: dst,src rr ← rr + 1 dst ← src These instructions are used for block transfers of data from program or data memory from the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair and is first incremented. The contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The contents of the source are unaffected. LDCPI refers to program memory and LDEPI refers to external data memory. The assembler makes 'Irr' an even number for program memory and an odd number for data memory. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src | dst 2 Cycles 14 Opcode (Hex) F3 Addr Mode dst src Irr r No flags are affected. www.DataSheet4U.com Examples: Given: R0 = 7FH, R6 = 21H, and R7 = 0FFH: LDCPI @RR6,R0 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; (RR6 ← RR6 + 1) 7FH (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location 2200H (21FFH + 1H) R0 = 7FH, R6 = 22H, R7 = 00H (RR6 ← RR6 + 1) 7FH (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory location 2200H (21FFH + 1H) R0 = 7FH, R6 = 22H, R7 = 00H LDEPI @RR6,R0 6-57 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B LDW — Load Word LDW Operation: dst,src dst ← src The contents of the source (a word) are loaded into the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src dst 3 Cycles 8 8 opc dst src 4 8 Opcode (Hex) C4 C5 C6 Addr Mode dst src RR RR RR RR IR IML No flags are affected. Examples: Given: R4 = 06H, R5 = 1CH, R6 = 05H, R7 = 02H, register 00H = 1AH, register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 03H, and register 03H = 0FH: LDW RR6,RR4 00H,02H RR2,@R7 04H,@01H RR6,#1234H 02H,#0FEDH → → → → → → R6 = 06H, R7 = 1CH, R4 = 06H, R5 = 1CH Register 00H = 03H, register 01H = 0FH, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0FH R2 = 03H, R3 = 0FH, Register 04H = 03H, register 05H = 0FH R6 = 12H, R7 = 34H Register 02H = 0FH, register 03H = 0EDH www.DataSheet4U.com LDW LDW LDW LDW LDW In the second example, please note that the statement "LDW 00H,02H" loads the contents of the source word 02H, 03H into the destination word 00H, 01H. This leaves the value 03H in general register 00H and the value 0FH in register 01H. The other examples show how to use the LDW instruction with various addressing modes and formats. 6-58 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET MULT — Multiply (Unsigned) MULT Operation: dst,src dst ← dst × src The 8-bit destination operand (even register of the register pair) is multiplied by the source operand (8 bits) and the product (16 bits) is stored in the register pair specified by the destination address. Both operands are treated as unsigned integers. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Set if result is > 255; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if MSB of the result is a "1"; cleared otherwise. Cleared. Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc src dst 3 Cycles 22 22 22 Opcode (Hex) 84 85 86 Addr Mode dst src RR RR RR R IR IM www.DataSheet4U.com Examples: Given: Register 00H = 20H, register 01H = 03H, register 02H = 09H, register 03H = 06H: MULT MULT MULT 00H, 02H 00H, @01H 00H, #30H → → → Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 20H, register 02H = 09H Register 00H = 00H, register 01H = 0C0H Register 00H = 06H, register 01H = 00H In the first example, the statement "MULT 00H,02H" multiplies the 8-bit destination operand (in the register 00H of the register pair 00H, 01H) by the source register 02H operand (09H). The 16-bit product, 0120H, is stored in the register pair 00H, 01H. 6-59 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B NEXT — Next NEXT Operation: PC ← @ IP IP ← IP + 2 The NEXT instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The program memory word that is pointed to by the instruction pointer is loaded into the program counter. The instruction pointer is then incremented by two. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 10 Opcode (Hex) 0F No flags are affected. Example: The following diagram shows one example of how to use the NEXT instruction. Before www.DataSheet4U.com After Address IP 0045 Address PC 0130 43 44 45 Address H Address L Address H Data Data Address IP 0043 Data Address PC 0120 43 44 45 Address H Address L Address H Data 01 10 120 Next Memory 130 Routine Memory 6-60 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET NOP — No Operation NOP Operation: Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) FF No action is performed when the CPU executes this instruction. Typically, one or more NOPs are executed in sequence in order to effect a timing delay of variable duration. No flags are affected. Example: When the instruction NOP is encountered in a program, no operation occurs. Instead, there is a delay in instruction execution time. www.DataSheet4U.com 6-61 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B OR — Logical OR OR Operation: dst,src dst ← dst OR src The source operand is logically ORed with the destination operand and the result is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. The OR operation results in a "1" being stored whenever either of the corresponding bits in the two operands is a "1"; otherwise a "0" is stored. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Always cleared to "0". Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Opcode (Hex) 42 43 44 45 46 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM www.DataSheet4U.com Examples: Given: R0 = 15H, R1 = 2AH, R2 = 01H, register 00H = 08H, register 01H = 37H, and register 08H = 8AH: OR OR OR OR OR R0,R1 R0,@R2 00H,01H 01H,@00H 00H,#02H → → → → → R0 = 3FH, R1 = 2AH R0 = 37H, R2 = 01H, register 01H = 37H Register 00H = 3FH, register 01H = 37H Register 00H = 08H, register 01H = 0BFH Register 00H = 0AH In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 15H and register R1 the value 2AH, the statement "OR R0,R1" logical-ORs the R0 and R1 register contents and stores the result (3FH) in destination register R0. The other examples show the use of the logical OR instruction with the various addressing modes and formats. 6-62 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET POP — Pop From Stack POP Operation: dst dst ← @SP SP ← SP + 1 The contents of the location addressed by the stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The stack pointer is then incremented by one. Flags: Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 8 8 Opcode (Hex) 50 51 Addr Mode dst R IR No flags affected. Examples: Given: Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 1BH, SPH (0D8H) = 00H, SPL (0D9H) = 0FBH, and stack register 0FBH = 55H: POP 00H @00H → → Register 00H = 55H, SP = 00FCH Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 55H, SP = 00FCH www.DataSheet4U.com POP In the first example, general register 00H contains the value 01H. The statement "POP 00H" loads the contents of location 00FBH (55H) into destination register 00H and then increments the stack pointer by one. Register 00H then contains the value 55H and the SP points to location 00FCH. 6-63 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B POPUD — Pop User Stack (Decrementing) POPUD Operation: dst,src dst ← src IR ← IR – 1 This instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. The contents of the register file location addressed by the user stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The user stack pointer is then decremented. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src dst 3 Cycles 8 Opcode (Hex) 92 Addr Mode dst src R IR No flags are affected. Example: Given: Register 00H = 42H (user stack pointer register), register 42H = 6FH, and register 02H = 70H: POPUD 02H,@00H → Register 00H = 41H, register 02H = 6FH, register 42H = 6FH www.DataSheet4U.com If general register 00H contains the value 42H and register 42H the value 6FH, the statement "POPUD 02H,@00H" loads the contents of register 42H into the destination register 02H. The user stack pointer is then decremented by one, leaving the value 41H. 6-64 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET POPUI — Pop User Stack (Incrementing) POPUI Operation: dst,src dst ← src IR ← IR + 1 The POPUI instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. The contents of the register file location addressed by the user stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The user stack pointer is then incremented. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src dst 3 Cycles 8 Opcode (Hex) 93 Addr Mode dst src R IR No flags are affected. Example: Given: Register 00H = 01H and register 01H = 70H: POPUI 02H,@00H → Register 00H = 02H, register 01H = 70H, register 02H = 70H www.DataSheet4U.com If general register 00H contains the value 01H and register 01H the value 70H, the statement "POPUI 02H,@00H" loads the value 70H into the destination general register 02H. The user stack pointer (register 00H) is then incremented by one, changing its value from 01H to 02H. 6-65 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B PUSH — Push To Stack PUSH Operation: src SP ← SP – 1 @SP ← src A PUSH instruction decrements the stack pointer value and loads the contents of the source (src) into the location addressed by the decremented stack pointer. The operation then adds the new value to the top of the stack. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src 2 Cycles 8 (internal clock) 8 (external clock) 8 (internal clock) 8 (external clock) 71 IR Opcode (Hex) 70 Addr Mode dst R No flags are affected. www.DataSheet4U.com Examples: Given: Register 40H = 4FH, register 4FH = 0AAH, SPH = 00H, and SPL = 00H: PUSH PUSH 40H @40H → → Register 40H = 4FH, stack register 0FFH = 4FH, SPH = 0FFH, SPL = 0FFH Register 40H = 4FH, register 4FH = 0AAH, stack register 0FFH = 0AAH, SPH = 0FFH, SPL = 0FFH In the first example, if the stack pointer contains the value 0000H, and general register 40H the value 4FH, the statement "PUSH 40H" decrements the stack pointer from 0000 to 0FFFFH. It then loads the contents of register 40H into location 0FFFFH and adds this new value to the top of the stack. 6-66 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET PUSHUD — Push User Stack (Decrementing) PUSHUD Operation: dst,src IR ← IR – 1 dst ← src This instruction is used to address user-defined stacks in the register file. PUSHUD decrements the user stack pointer and loads the contents of the source into the register addressed by the decremented stack pointer. Flags: Format: Bytes opc dst src 3 Cycles 8 Opcode (Hex) 82 Addr Mode dst src IR R No flags are affected. Example: Given: Register 00H = 03H, register 01H = 05H, and register 02H = 1AH: PUSHUD @00H,01H → Register 00H = 02H, register 01H = 05H, register 02H = 05H www.DataSheet4U.com If the user stack pointer (register 00H, for example) contains the value 03H, the statement "PUSHUD @00H,01H" decrements the user stack pointer by one, leaving the value 02H. The 01H register value, 05H, is then loaded into the register addressed by the decremented user stack pointer. 6-67 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B PUSHUI — Push User Stack (Incrementing) PUSHUI Operation: dst,src IR ← IR + 1 dst ← src This instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. PUSHUI increments the user stack pointer and then loads the contents of the source into the register location addressed by the incremented user stack pointer. Flags: Format: Bytes opc dst src 3 Cycles 8 Opcode (Hex) 83 Addr Mode dst src IR R No flags are affected. Example: Given: Register 00H = 03H, register 01H = 05H, and register 04H = 2AH: PUSHUI @00H,01H → Register 00H = 04H, register 01H = 05H, register 04H = 05H www.DataSheet4U.com If the user stack pointer (register 00H, for example) contains the value 03H, the statement "PUSHUI @00H,01H" increments the user stack pointer by one, leaving the value 04H. The 01H register value, 05H, is then loaded into the location addressed by the incremented user stack pointer. 6-68 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET RCF — Reset Carry Flag RCF Operation: RCF C←0 The carry flag is cleared to logic zero, regardless of its previous value. Flags: C: Cleared to "0". No other flags are affected. Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) CF Example: Given: C = "1" or "0": The instruction RCF clears the carry flag (C) to logic zero. www.DataSheet4U.com 6-69 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B RET — Return RET Operation: PC ← @SP SP ← SP + 2 The RET instruction is normally used to return to the previously executing procedure at the end of a procedure entered by a CALL instruction. The contents of the location addressed by the stack pointer are popped into the program counter. The next statement that is executed is the one that is addressed by the new program counter value. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 8 (internal stack) 10 (internal stack) Opcode (Hex) AF No flags are affected. Example: Given: SP = 00FCH, (SP) = 101AH, and PC = 1234: RET → PC = 101AH, SP = 00FEH www.DataSheet4U.com The statement "RET" pops the contents of stack pointer location 00FCH (10H) into the high byte of the program counter. The stack pointer then pops the value in location 00FEH (1AH) into the PC's low byte and the instruction at location 101AH is executed. The stack pointer now points to memory location 00FEH. 6-70 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET RL — Rotate Left RL Operation: dst C ← dst (7) dst (0) ← dst (7) dst (n + 1) ← dst (n), n = 0–6 The contents of the destination operand are rotated left one bit position. The initial value of bit 7 is moved to the bit zero (LSB) position and also replaces the carry flag. 7 C 0 Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Set if the bit rotated from the most significant bit position (bit 7) was "1". Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise. Unaffected. Unaffected. www.DataSheet4U.com Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) 90 91 Addr Mode dst R IR Examples: Given: Register 00H = 0AAH, register 01H = 02H and register 02H = 17H: RL RL 00H @01H → → Register 00H = 55H, C = "1" Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 2EH, C = "0" In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 0AAH (10101010B), the statement "RL 00H" rotates the 0AAH value left one bit position, leaving the new value 55H (01010101B) and setting the carry and overflow flags. 6-71 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B RLC — Rotate Left Through Carry RLC Operation: dst dst (0) ← C C ← dst (7) dst (n + 1) ← dst (n), n = 0–6 The contents of the destination operand with the carry flag are rotated left one bit position. The initial value of bit 7 replaces the carry flag (C); the initial value of the carry flag replaces bit zero. 7 C 0 Flags: C: Z: S: V: Set if the bit rotated from the most significant bit position (bit 7) was "1". Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination changed during rotation; cleared otherwise. D: Unaffected. H: Unaffected. www.DataSheet4U.com Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) 10 11 Addr Mode dst R IR Examples: Given: Register 00H = 0AAH, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 17H, C = "0": RLC RLC 00H @01H → → Register 00H = 54H, C = "1" Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 2EH, C = "0" In the first example, if general register 00H has the value 0AAH (10101010B), the statement "RLC 00H" rotates 0AAH one bit position to the left. The initial value of bit 7 sets the carry flag and the initial value of the C flag replaces bit zero of register 00H, leaving the value 55H (01010101B). The MSB of register 00H resets the carry flag to "1" and sets the overflow flag. 6-72 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET RR — Rotate Right RR Operation: dst C ← dst (0) dst (7) ← dst (0) dst (n) ← dst (n + 1), n = 0–6 The contents of the destination operand are rotated right one bit position. The initial value of bit zero (LSB) is moved to bit 7 (MSB) and also replaces the carry flag (C). 7 C 0 Flags: C: Z: S: V: Set if the bit rotated from the least significant bit position (bit zero) was "1". Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination changed during rotation; cleared otherwise. D: Unaffected. H: Unaffected. www.DataSheet4U.com Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) E0 E1 Addr Mode dst R IR Examples: Given: Register 00H = 31H, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 17H: RR RR 00H @01H → → Register 00H = 98H, C = "1" Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 8BH, C = "1" In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 31H (00110001B), the statement "RR 00H" rotates this value one bit position to the right. The initial value of bit zero is moved to bit 7, leaving the new value 98H (10011000B) in the destination register. The initial bit zero also resets the C flag to "1" and the sign flag and overflow flag are also set to "1". 6-73 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B RRC — Rotate Right Through Carry RRC Operation: dst dst (7) ← C C ← dst (0) dst (n) ← dst (n + 1), n = 0–6 The contents of the destination operand and the carry flag are rotated right one bit position. The initial value of bit zero (LSB) replaces the carry flag; the initial value of the carry flag replaces bit 7 (MSB). 7 C 0 Flags: C: Z: S: V: www.DataSheet4U.com Set if the bit rotated from the least significant bit position (bit zero) was "1". Set if the result is "0" cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination changed during rotation; cleared otherwise. D: Unaffected. H: Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) C0 C1 Addr Mode dst R IR Examples: Given: Register 00H = 55H, register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 17H, and C = "0": RRC RRC 00H @01H → → Register 00H = 2AH, C = "1" Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 0BH, C = "1" In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 55H (01010101B), the statement "RRC 00H" rotates this value one bit position to the right. The initial value of bit zero ("1") replaces the carry flag and the initial value of the C flag ("1") replaces bit 7. This leaves the new value 2AH (00101010B) in destination register 00H. The sign flag and overflow flag are both cleared to "0". 6-74 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET SB0 — Select Bank 0 SB0 Operation: BANK ← 0 The SB0 instruction clears the bank address flag in the FLAGS register (FLAGS.0) to logic zero, selecting bank 0 register addressing in the set 1 area of the register file. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 4F No flags are affected. Example: The statement SB0 clears FLAGS.0 to "0", selecting bank 0 register addressing. www.DataSheet4U.com 6-75 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B SB1 — Select Bank 1 SB1 Operation: BANK ← 1 The SB1 instruction sets the bank address flag in the FLAGS register (FLAGS.0) to logic one, selecting bank 1 register addressing in the set 1 area of the register file. (Bank 1 is not implemented in some S3C8-series microcontrollers.) Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 5F No flags are affected. Example: The statement SB1 sets FLAGS.0 to "1", selecting bank 1 register addressing, if implemented. www.DataSheet4U.com 6-76 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET SBC — Subtract with Carry SBC Operation: dst,src dst ← dst – src – c The source operand, along with the current value of the carry flag, is subtracted from the destination operand and the result is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Subtraction is performed by adding the two's-complement of the source operand to the destination operand. In multiple precision arithmetic, this instruction permits the carry ("borrow") from the subtraction of the low-order operands to be subtracted from the subtraction of high-order operands. Flags: C: Z: S: V: Set if a borrow occurred (src > dst); cleared otherwise. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the operands were of opposite sign and the sign of the result is the same as the sign of the source; cleared otherwise. D: Always set to "1". H: Cleared if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result; set otherwise, indicating a "borrow". Format: Bytes opc www.DataSheet4U.com Cycles 4 6 Opcode (Hex) 32 33 34 35 36 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM dst | src 2 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Examples: Given: R1 = 10H, R2 = 03H, C = "1", register 01H = 20H, register 02H = 03H, and register 03H = 0AH: SBC SBC SBC SBC SBC R1,R2 R1,@R2 01H,02H 01H,@02H 01H,#8AH → → → → → R1 = 0CH, R2 = 03H R1 = 05H, R2 = 03H, register 03H = 0AH Register 01H = 1CH, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 15H,register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH Register 01H = 95H; C, S, and V = "1" In the first example, if working register R1 contains the value 10H and register R2 the value 03H, the statement "SBC R1,R2" subtracts the source value (03H) and the C flag value ("1") from the destination (10H) and then stores the result (0CH) in register R1. 6-77 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B SCF — Set Carry Flag SCF Operation: C←1 The carry flag (C) is set to logic one, regardless of its previous value. Flags: C: Set to "1". No other flags are affected. Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) DF Example: The statement SCF sets the carry flag to logic one. www.DataSheet4U.com 6-78 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET SRA — Shift Right Arithmetic SRA Operation: dst dst (7) ← dst (7) C ← dst (0) dst (n) ← dst (n + 1), n = 0–6 An arithmetic shift-right of one bit position is performed on the destination operand. Bit zero (the LSB) replaces the carry flag. The value of bit 7 (the sign bit) is unchanged and is shifted into bit position 6. 7 C 6 0 Flags: www.DataSheet4U.com C: Z: S: V: D: H: Set if the bit shifted from the LSB position (bit zero) was "1". Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Always cleared to "0". Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) D0 D1 Addr Mode dst R IR Examples: Given: Register 00H = 9AH, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0BCH, and C = "1": SRA SRA 00H @02H → → Register 00H = 0CD, C = "0" Register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0DEH, C = "0" In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 9AH (10011010B), the statement "SRA 00H" shifts the bit values in register 00H right one bit position. Bit zero ("0") clears the C flag and bit 7 ("1") is then shifted into the bit 6 position (bit 7 remains unchanged). This leaves the value 0CDH (11001101B) in destination register 00H. 6-79 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B SRP/SRP0/SRP1 — Set Register Pointer SRP SRP0 SRP1 Operation: src src src If src (1) = 1 and src (0) = 0 then: RP0 (3–7) If src (1) = 0 and src (0) = 1 then: RP1 (3–7) If src (1) = 0 and src (0) = 0 then: RP0 (4–7) RP0 (3) RP1 (4–7) RP1 (3) ← ← ← ← ← ← src (3–7) src (3–7) src (4–7), 0 src (4–7), 1 The source data bits one and zero (LSB) determine whether to write one or both of the register pointers, RP0 and RP1. Bits 3–7 of the selected register pointer are written unless both register pointers are selected. RP0.3 is then cleared to logic zero and RP1.3 is set to logic one. Flags: Format: Bytes www.DataSheet4U.com No flags are affected. Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 31 Addr Mode src IM opc src 2 Examples: The statement SRP #40H sets register pointer 0 (RP0) at location 0D6H to 40H and register pointer 1 (RP1) at location 0D7H to 48H. The statement "SRP0 #50H" sets RP0 to 50H, and the statement "SRP1 #68H" sets RP1 to 68H. 6-80 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET STOP — Stop Operation STOP Operation: The STOP instruction stops the both the CPU clock and system clock and causes the microcontroller to enter Stop mode. During Stop mode, the contents of on-chip CPU registers, peripheral registers, and I/O port control and data registers are retained. Stop mode can be released by an external reset operation or by external interrupts. For the reset operation, the RESET pin must be held to Low level until the required oscillation stabilization interval has elapsed. In application programs, a STOP instruction must be immediately followed by at least three NOP instructions. This ensures an adeguate time interval for the clock to stabilize before the next instruction is executed. If three or more NOP instructons are not used after STOP instruction, leakage current could be flown because of the floating state in the internal bus. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 7F Addr Mode dst src – – No flags are affected. www.DataSheet4U.com Example: The statement STOP NOP NOP NOP ; halts all microcontroller operations 6-81 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B SUB — Subtract SUB Operation: dst,src dst ← dst – src The source operand is subtracted from the destination operand and the result is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Subtraction is performed by adding the two's complement of the source operand to the destination operand. Flags: Set if a "borrow" occurred; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the operands were of opposite signs and the sign of the result is of the same as the sign of the source operand; cleared otherwise. D: Always set to "1". H: Cleared if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result; set otherwise indicating a "borrow". C: Z: S: V: Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 www.DataSheet4U.com Opcode (Hex) 22 23 24 25 26 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Examples: Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, register 01H = 21H, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH: SUB SUB SUB SUB SUB SUB R1,R2 R1,@R2 01H,02H 01H,@02H 01H,#90H 01H,#65H → → → → → → R1 = 0FH, R2 = 03H R1 = 08H, R2 = 03H Register 01H = 1EH, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 17H, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 91H; C, S, and V = "1" Register 01H = 0BCH; C and S = "1", V = "0" In the first example, if working register R1 contains the value 12H and if register R2 contains the value 03H, the statement "SUB R1,R2" subtracts the source value (03H) from the destination value (12H) and stores the result (0FH) in destination register R1. 6-82 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET SWAP — Swap Nibbles SWAP Operation: dst dst (0 – 3) ↔ dst (4 – 7) The contents of the lower four bits and upper four bits of the destination operand are swapped. 7 43 0 Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Undefined. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Undefined. Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes www.DataSheet4U.com Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) F0 F1 Addr Mode dst R IR opc dst 2 Examples: Given: Register 00H = 3EH, register 02H = 03H, and register 03H = 0A4H: SWAP SWAP 00H @02H → → Register 00H = 0E3H Register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 4AH In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 3EH (00111110B), the statement "SWAP 00H" swaps the lower and upper four bits (nibbles) in the 00H register, leaving the value 0E3H (11100011B). 6-83 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B TCM — Test Complement Under Mask TCM Operation: dst,src (NOT dst) AND src This instruction tests selected bits in the destination operand for a logic one value. The bits to be tested are specified by setting a "1" bit in the corresponding position of the source operand (mask). The TCM statement complements the destination operand, which is then ANDed with the source mask. The zero (Z) flag can then be checked to determine the result. The destination and source operands are unaffected. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Always cleared to "0". Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 www.DataSheet4U.com Opcode (Hex) 62 63 64 65 66 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Examples: Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2 = 12H, register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 23H: TCM TCM TCM TCM TCM R0,R1 R0,@R1 00H,01H 00H,@01H 00H,#34 → → → → → R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, Z = "1" R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 23H, Z = "0" Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, Z = "1" Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 23H, Z = "1" Register 00H = 2BH, Z = "0" In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 0C7H (11000111B) and register R1 the value 02H (00000010B), the statement "TCM R0,R1" tests bit one in the destination register for a "1" value. Because the mask value corresponds to the test bit, the Z flag is set to logic one and can be tested to determine the result of the TCM operation. 6-84 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET TM — Test Under Mask TM Operation: dst,src dst AND src This instruction tests selected bits in the destination operand for a logic zero value. The bits to be tested are specified by setting a "1" bit in the corresponding position of the source operand (mask), which is ANDed with the destination operand. The zero (Z) flag can then be checked to determine the result. The destination and source operands are unaffected. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Always reset to "0". Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Opcode (Hex) 72 73 74 75 76 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM www.DataSheet4U.com Examples: Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2 = 18H, register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 23H: TM TM TM TM TM R0,R1 R0,@R1 00H,01H 00H,@01H 00H,#54H → → → → → R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, Z = "0" R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 23H, Z = "0" Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, Z = "0" Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 23H, Z = "0" Register 00H = 2BH, Z = "1" In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 0C7H (11000111B) and register R1 the value 02H (00000010B), the statement "TM R0,R1" tests bit one in the destination register for a "0" value. Because the mask value does not match the test bit, the Z flag is cleared to logic zero and can be tested to determine the result of the TM operation. 6-85 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B WFI — Wait for Interrupt WFI Operation: The CPU is effectively halted until an interrupt occurs, except that DMA transfers can still take place during this wait state. The WFI status can be released by an internal interrupt, including a fast interrupt . Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles Opcode (Hex) No flags are affected. 4n 3F ( n = 1, 2, 3, … ) Example: The following sample program structure shows the sequence of operations that follow a "WFI" statement: Main program www.DataSheet4U.com . . . EI WFI (Next instruction) (Enable global interrupt) (Wait for interrupt) . . . Interrupt occurs Interrupt service routine . . . Clear interrupt flag IRET Service routine completed 6-86 S3C831B/P831B INSTRUCTION SET XOR — Logical Exclusive OR XOR Operation: dst,src dst ← dst XOR src The source operand is logically exclusive-ORed with the destination operand and the result is stored in the destination. The exclusive-OR operation results in a "1" bit being stored whenever the corresponding bits in the operands are different; otherwise, a "0" bit is stored. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Always reset to "0". Unaffected. Unaffected. Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc www.DataSheet4U.com Opcode (Hex) B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Examples: Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2 = 18H, register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 23H: XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR R0,R1 R0,@R1 00H,01H 00H,@01H 00H,#54H → → → → → R0 = 0C5H, R1 = 02H R0 = 0E4H, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 23H Register 00H = 29H, register 01H = 02H Register 00H = 08H, register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 23H Register 00H = 7FH In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 0C7H and if register R1 contains the value 02H, the statement "XOR R0,R1" logically exclusive-ORs the R1 value with the R0 value and stores the result (0C5H) in the destination register R0. 6-87 INSTRUCTION SET S3C831B/P831B NOTES www.DataSheet4U.com 6-88 S3C831B/P831B CLOCK CIRCUIT 7 OVERVIEW CLOCK CIRCUIT The clock frequency generated for the S3C831B by an external crystal can range from 0.4 MHz to 9.0 MHz. The maximum CPU clock frequency is 9.0 MHz. The XIN and XOUT pins connect the external oscillator or clock source to the on-chip clock circuit. SYSTEM CLOCK CIRCUIT The system clock circuit has the following components: — External crystal or ceramic resonator oscillation source (or an external clock source) — Oscillator stop and wake-up functions — Programmable frequency divider for the CPU clock (fxx divided by 1, 2, 8, or 16) — System clock control register, CLKCON www.DataSheet4U.com — STOP control register, STPCON CPU Clock Notation In this document, the following notation is used for descriptions of the CPU clock; fx: main clock fxt: sub clock (the fxt is not implemented in the S3C831B) fxx: selected system clock C1 XIN XIN S3C831B S3C831B C2 XOUT XOUT Figure 7-1. Main Oscillator Circuit (Crystal or Ceramic Oscillator) Figure 7-2. Main Oscillator Circuit (External Oscillator) 7-1 CLOCK CIRCUIT S3C831B/P831B CLOCK STATUS DURING POWER-DOWN MODES The two power-down modes, Stop mode and Idle mode, affect the system clock as follows: — In Stop mode, the main oscillator is halted. Stop mode is released, and the oscillator is started, by a reset operation or an external interrupt (with RC delay noise filter). — In Idle mode, the internal clock signal is gated to the CPU, but not to interrupt structure, timers, timer/ counters, and watch timer. Idle mode is released by a reset or by an external or internal interrupt. Stop Release INT Main-System Oscillator Circuit fX fXT Sub-system Oscillator Circuit Selector 1 fXX Stop www.DataSheet4U.com Logic "0" Logic "0" STOP OSC inst. STPCON 1/1-1/4096 Basic Timer Timer/Counters LCD Controller SIO0, SIO1 A/D Converter Stop Logic "1" Frequency Dividing Circuit 1/1 1/2 1/8 1/16 1/2 IFMOD.7 Watch Timer PLL Frequency Synthesizer IF Counter CLKCON.4-.3 Selector 2 CPU Clock NOTE: The fxt is not implemented in the S3C831B. IDLE Instruction Figure 7-3. System Clock Circuit Diagram 7-2 S3C831B/P831B CLOCK CIRCUIT SYSTEM CLOCK CONTROL REGISTER (CLKCON) The system clock control register, CLKCON, is located in the set 1, address D4H. It is read/write addressable and has the following functions: — Oscillator frequency divide-by value After the main oscillator is activated, and the fxx/16 (the slowest clock speed) is selected as the CPU clock. If necessary, you can then increase the CPU clock speed fxx/8, fxx/2, or fxx/1. System Clock Control Register (CLKCON) D4H, Set 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Not used (must keep always 0) Oscillator IRQ wake-up function bit: 0 = Enable IRQ for main wake-up in power down mode 1 = Disable IRQ for main wake-up in power down mode Not used (must keep always 0) www.DataSheet4U.com Divide-by selection bits for CPU clock frequency: 00 = fXX/16 01 = fXX/8 10 = fXX/2 11 = fXX/1 (non-divided) Figure 7-4. System Clock Control Register (CLKCON) 7-3 CLOCK CIRCUIT S3C831B/P831B STOP Control Register (STPCON) FBH, Set 1,bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB STOP Control bits: Other values = Disable STOP instruction 10100101 = Enable STOP instruction NOTE: Before execute the STOP instruction, set this STPCON register as "10100101B". Otherwise the STOP instruction will not execute as well as reset will be generated. Figure 7-5. STOP Control Register (STPCON) www.DataSheet4U.com 7-4 S3C831B/P831B RESET and POWER-DOWN 8 OVERVIEW RESET and POWER-DOWN SYSTEM RESET During a power-on reset, the voltage at VDD goes to High level and the RESET pin is forced to Low level. The RESET signal is input through a schmitt trigger circuit where it is then synchronized with the CPU clock. This procedure brings the S3C831B into a known operating status. To allow time for internal CPU clock oscillation to stabilize, the RESET pin must be held to Low level for a minimum time interval after the power supply comes within tolerance. The minimum required time of a reset operation for oscillation stabilization is 1 millisecond. Whenever a reset occurs during normal operation (that is, when both VDD and RESET are High level), the RESET pin is forced Low level and the reset operation starts. All system and peripheral control registers are then reset to their default hardware values www.DataSheet4U.com In summary, the following sequence of events occurs during a reset operation: — All interrupt is disabled. — The watchdog function (basic timer) is enabled. — Ports 0-3 are set to input mode, and all pull-up resistors are disabled for the I/O port. — Peripheral control and data register settings are disabled and reset to their default hardware values. — The program counter (PC) is loaded with the program reset address in the ROM, 0100H. — When the programmed oscillation stabilization time interval has elapsed, the instruction stored in ROM location 0100H (and 0101H) is fetched and executed. NORMAL MODE RESET OPERATION In normal (masked ROM) mode, the Test pin is tied to VSS. A reset enables access to the 64-Kbyte on-chip ROM. NOTE To program the duration of the oscillation stabilization interval, you make the appropriate settings to the basic timer control register, BTCON, before entering Stop mode. Also, if you do not want to use the basic timer watchdog function (which causes a system reset if a basic timer counter overflow occurs), you can disable it by writing "1010B" to the upper nibble of BTCON. 8-1 RESET and POWER-DOWN RESET S3C831B/P831B HARDWARE RESET VALUES Table 8-1, 8-2, 8-3 list the reset values for CPU and system registers, peripheral control registers, and peripheral data registers following a reset operation. The following notation is used to represent reset values: — A "1" or a "0" shows the reset bit value as logic one or logic zero, respectively. — An "x" means that the bit value is undefined after a reset. — A dash ("–") means that the bit is either not used or not mapped, but read 0 is the bit value. Table 8-1. S3C831B Set 1 Register and Values after RESET RESET Register Name Mnemonic Address Dec Basic Timer Control Register Clock Control Register System Flags Register Register Pointer (High Byte) Register Pointer (Low Byte) Stack Pointer (High Byte) Stack Pointer (Low Byte) www.DataSheet4U.com Bit Values after RESET 7 0 0 x 1 1 x x x x 0 x 0 0 6 0 – x 1 1 x x x x 0 x – 0 5 0 – x 0 0 x x x x 0 x – 0 4 0 0 x 0 0 x x x x 0 x x 0 3 0 0 x 0 1 x x x x 0 x x 0 2 0 – x – – x x x x 0 x x 0 1 0 – 0 – – x x x x 0 x 0 0 0 0 – 0 – – x x x x 0 x 0 0 Hex D3H D4H D5H D6H D7H D8H D9H DAH DBH DCH DDH DEH DFH Locations D0H-D2H are not mapped. BTCON CLKCON FLAGS RP0 RP1 SPH SPL IPH IPL IRQ IMR SYM PP 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 Instruction Pointer (High Byte) Instruction Pointer (Low Byte) Interrupt Request Register Interrupt Mask Register System Mode Register Register Page Pointer 8-2 S3C831B/P831B RESET and POWER-DOWN Table 8-2. S3C831B Set 1, Bank 0 Register Values after RESET RESET Register Name Mnemonic Address Dec Timer 0 Counter Register Timer 0 Data Register Timer 0 Control Register Timer 1 Counter Register Timer 1 Data Register Timer 1 Control Register Interrupt Pending Register Watch Timer Control Register SIO 0 Control Register SIO 0 Data Register SIO 0 Prescaler Register SIO 1 Control Register SIO 1 Data Register SIO 1 Prescaler Register www.DataSheet4U.com Bit Values after RESET 7 0 1 0 0 1 0 – – 0 0 0 0 0 0 – x 0 0 0 0 0 x x 6 0 1 0 0 1 0 – 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x – 0 – 0 0 x x 5 0 1 0 0 1 0 – 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x – 0 – 0 0 x x 4 0 1 0 0 1 0 – 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x – 0 0 0 0 x x 3 0 1 0 0 1 0 – 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 x x 2 0 1 0 0 1 0 – 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 x x 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 x x 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 x x Hex E0H E1H E2H E3H E4H E5H E6H E8H E9H EAH EBH ECH EDH EEH EFH F0H F1H F2H F3H F4H F5H F6H F7H F8H F9H FBH FDH FFH T0CNT T0DATA T0CON T1CNT T1DATA T1CON INTPND WTCON SIO0CON SIO0DATA SIO0PS SIO1CON SIO1DATA SIO1PS ADCON ADDATA LCON LMOD IFMOD IFCNT1 IFCNT0 PLLD1 PLLD0 PLLMOD PLLREF STPCON BTCNT IPR 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 251 253 255 Location E7H is not mapped. A/D Converter Control Register A/D Converter Data Register LCD Control Register LCD Mode Register IF Counter Mode Register IF Counter 1 IF Counter 0 PLL Data Register 1 PLL Data Register 0 PLL Mode Register PLL Reference Frequency Register STOP Control Register Basic Timer Data Register Interrupt Priority Register (note) (note) Location FAH is not mapped. 0 0 x 0 0 x 0 0 x 0 0 x 0 0 x 0 0 x 0 0 x 0 0 x Location FCH is not mapped. Location FEH is not mapped. NOTE: Refer to the corresponding register in the chapter 4. 8-3 RESET and POWER-DOWN RESET S3C831B/P831B Table 8-3. S3C831B Set 1, Bank 1 Register Values after RESET RESET Register Name Mnemonic Address Dec Port 0 Control Register (High Byte) Port 0 Control Register (Low Byte) Port 0 Pull-up Resistors Enable Register Port 1 Control Register (High Byte) Port 1 Control Register (Low Byte) Port 1 Interrupt Control Register Port 1 Interrupt Pending Register Port 2 Control Register (High Byte) Port 2 Control Register (Low Byte) Port 3 Control Register (High Byte) Port 3 Control Register (Low Byte) Port 3 Pull-up Resistors Enable Register Port Group 0 Control Register www.DataSheet4U.com Bit Values after RESET 7 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Hex E0H E1H E2H P0CONH P0CONL P0PUR 224 225 226 Locations E3H is not mapped. P1CONH P1CONL P1INT P1PND P2CONH P2CONL P3CONH P3CONL P3PUR PG0CON PG1CON PG2CON P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 T2CNTH T2CNTL T2DATAH T2DATAL T2CON 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 250 251 252 253 254 E4H E5H E6H E7H E8H E9H EAH EBH ECH EDH EEH EFH F0H F1H F2H F3H F4H F5H F6H F7H F8H F9H FBH FCH FDH FEH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 Port Group 1 Control Register Port Group 2 Control Register Port 0 Data Register Port 1 Data Register Port 2 Data Register Port 3 Data Register Port 4 Data Register Port 5 Data Register Port 6 Data Register Port 7 Data Register Port 8 Data Register Timer 2 Counter (High Byte) Timer 2 Counter (Low Byte) Timer 2 Data Register (High Byte) Timer 2 Data Register (Low Byte) Timer 2 Control Register Location F9H is not mapped. Location FFH is not mapped. 8-4 S3C831B/P831B RESET and POWER-DOWN POWER-DOWN MODES STOP MODE Stop mode is invoked by the instruction STOP (opcode 7FH). In Stop mode, the operation of the CPU and all peripherals is halted. That is, the on-chip main oscillator stops and the supply current is reduced to less than 3 µA. All system functions stop when the clock “freezes”, but data stored in the internal register file is retained. Stop mode can be released in one of two ways: by a reset or by external interrupts, for more details see Figure 73. NOTE Do not use stop mode if you are using an external clock source because XIN input must be restricted internally to VSS to reduce current leakage. Using RESET to Release Stop Mode RESET Stop mode is released when the RESET signal is released and returns to high level: all system and peripheral control registers are reset to their default hardware values and the contents of all data registers are retained. A reset operation automatically selects a slow clock fxx/16 because CLKCON.3 and CLKCON.4 are cleared to '00B'. After the programmed oscillation stabilization interval has elapsed, the CPU starts the system initialization routine by fetching the program instruction stored in ROM location 0100H. Using an External Interrupt to Release Stop Mode External interrupts with an RC-delay noise filter circuit can be used to release Stop mode. Which interrupt you can use to release Stop mode in a given situation depends on the microcontroller’s current internal operating mode. The external interrupts in the S3C831B interrupt structure that can be used to release Stop mode are: www.DataSheet4U.com — External interrupts P1.0–P1.7 (INT0–INT7) Please note the following conditions for Stop mode release: — If you release Stop mode using an external interrupt, the current values in system and peripheral control registers are unchanged except STPCON register. — If you use an internal or external interrupt for stop mode release, you can also program the duration of the oscillation stabilization interval. To do this, you must make the appropriate control and clock settings before entering stop mode. — When the Stop mode is released by external interrupt, the CLKCON.4 and CLKCON.3 bit-pair setting remains unchanged and the currently selected clock value is used. — The external interrupt is serviced when the Stop mode release occurs. Following the IRET from the service routine, the instruction immediately following the one that initiated Stop mode is executed. How to Enter into Stop Mode Handling STPCON register then writing Stop instruction (keep the order). LD STOP NOP NOP NOP STPCON, #10100101B 8-5 RESET and POWER-DOWN RESET S3C831B/P831B IDLE MODE Idle mode is invoked by the instruction IDLE (opcode 6FH). In idle mode, CPU operations are halted while some peripherals remain active. During idle mode, the internal clock signal is gated away from the CPU, but all peripherals remain active. Port pins retain the mode (input or output) they had at the time idle mode was entered. There are two ways to release idle mode: 1. Execute a reset. All system and peripheral control registers are reset to their default values and the contents of all data registers are retained. The reset automatically selects the slow clock fxx/16 because CLKCON.4 and CLKCON.3 are cleared to ‘00B’. If interrupts are masked, a reset is the only way to release idle mode. 2. Activate any enabled interrupt, causing idle mode to be released. When you use an interrupt to release idle mode, the CLKCON.4 and CLKCON.3 register values remain unchanged, and the currently selected clock value is used. The interrupt is then serviced. When the return-from-interrupt (IRET) occurs, the instruction immediately following the one that initiated idle mode is executed. www.DataSheet4U.com 8-6 S3C831B/P831B I/O PORTS 9 OVERVIEW I/O PORTS The S3C831B microcontroller has four bit-programmable and five nibble-programmable I/O ports, P0–P8. The port 0–8 are all 8-bit ports. This gives a total of 72 I/O pins. Each port can be flexibly configured to meet application design requirements. The CPU accesses ports by directly writing or reading port registers. No special I/O instructions are required. All ports of the S3C831B can be configured to input or output mode and P4– P8 are shared with LCD segment signals. Table 9-1 gives you a general overview of the S3C831B I/O port functions. www.DataSheet4U.com 9-1 I/O PORTS S3C831B/P831B Table 9-1. S3C831B Port Configuration Overview Port 0 Configuration Options 1-bit programmable I/O port. Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-up. Alternately P0.1–P0.7 can be used as T0CLK, T0CAP, T0OUT/T0PWM, T1CLK, T1OUT, T2CLK, T2OUT. 1-bit programmable I/O port. Input or push-pull output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-up (P1.0-.3: Shmitt trigger input, P1.4-.7: Input). P1.0–P1.7 can be used as inputs for external interrupts INT0–INT7 (with noise filter and interrupt control). 1-bit programmable I/O port. Schmitt trigger input or push-pull output mode selected by software; software assignable pullup. Alternately P2.0–P2.7 can be used as AD0–AD7. 1-bit programmable I/O port. Input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-up. Alternately P3.0–P3.6 can be used as BUZ, SCK0, SO0, SI0, SCK1, SO1, SI1. 4-bit programmable I/O port. Input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-up. P4.0–P4.7 can alternately be used as outputs for LCD segment signals. 4-bit programmable I/O port. Input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-up. P5.0–P5.7 can alternately be used as outputs for LCD segment signals. 4-bit programmable I/O port. Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-up. P6.0–P6.7 can alternately be used as outputs for LCD segment signals. 4-bit programmable I/O port. Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-up. P7.0–P7.7 can alternately be used as outputs for LCD segment signals. 4-bit programmable I/O port. Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-up. P8.0–P8.7 can alternately be used as outputs for LCD segment signals. 1 2 3 4 5 www.DataSheet4U.com 6 7 8 9-2 S3C831B/P831B I/O PORTS PORT DATA REGISTERS Table 9-2 gives you an overview of the register locations of all nine S3C831B I/O port data registers. Data registers for ports 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 have the general format shown in Figure 9-1. Table 9-2. Port Data Register Summary Register Name Port 0 data register Port 1 data register Port 2 data register Port 3 data register Port 4 data register Port 5 data register Port 6 data register Port 7 data register Port 8 data register Mnemonic P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 Decimal 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 Hex F0H F1H F2H F3H F4H F5H F6H F7H F8H Location Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W www.DataSheet4U.com 9-3 I/O PORTS S3C831B/P831B PORT 0 Port 0 is an 8-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 0 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading the port 0 data register, P0 at location F0H in set 1, bank 1. P0.0–P0.7 can serve inputs, as outputs (push pull or open-drain) or you can configure the following alternative functions: — Low-nibble pins (P0.1-P0.3): T0CLK, T0CAP, T0OUT/T0PWM — High-nibble pins (P0.4-P0.7): T1CLK, T1OUT, T2CLK, T2OUT Port 0 Control Register Port 0 has two 8-bit control registers: P0CONH for P0.4–P0.7 and P0CONL for P0.0–P0.3. A reset clears the P0CONH and P0CONL registers to “00H”, configuring all pins to input mode. You use control registers settings to select input or output mode (push-pull or open drain) and enable the alternative functions. When programming the port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the port 0 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module. Port 0 Pull-up Resistor Enable Register (P0PUR) Using the port 0 pull-up resistor enable register, P0PUR (E2H, set 1, bank 1), you can configure pull-up resistors to individual port 0 pins. www.DataSheet4U.com Port 0 Control Register, High Byte E0H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB P0.4/T1CLK P0.5/T1OUT P0.6/T2CLK P0.7/T2OUT P0CONH bit-pair pin configuration settings 00 01 10 11 Input mode (T1CLK, T2CLK) Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (T1OUT, T2OUT) Output mode, push-pull Figure 9-1. Port 0 High-Byte Control Register (P0CONH) 9-4 S3C831B/P831B I/O PORTS Port 0 Control Register, Low Byte E1H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB P0.0 P0.1/T0CLK P0.2/T0CAP P0.3/T0OUT /T0PWM P0CONL bit-pair pin configuration settings 00 01 10 11 Input mode (T0CAP, T0CLK) Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (T0OUT, T0PWM) Output mode, push-pull Figure 9-2. Port 0 Low-Byte Control Register (P0CONL) www.DataSheet4U.com Port 0 Pull-up Control Register E2H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB P0.7 P0.6 P0.5 P0.4 P0.3 P0.2 P0.1 P0.0 P0PUR bit configuration settings: 0 1 NOTE: Disable pull-up resistor Enable pull-up resistor The corresponding pull-up resistor is disabled automatically, when a bit of port 0 is selected as output mode. Figure 9-3. Port 0 Pull-up Control Register (P0PUR) 9-5 I/O PORTS S3C831B/P831B PORT 1 Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O Port that you can use two ways: — General-purpose I/O — External interrupt inputs for INT0–INT7 Port 1 is accessed directly by writing or reading the port 1 data register, P1 at location F1H in set 1, bank 1. NOTE The port 1 inputs can be disabled by PG2CON.5–.4 when the port is selected as input mode. Refer to the PG2CON register. Port 1 Control Register (P1CONH, P1CONL) Port 1 pins are configured individually by bit-pair settings in two control registers located in set 1, bank 1: P1CONL (low byte, E5H) and P1CONH (high byte, E4H). When you select output mode, a push-pull circuit is automatically configured. In input mode, three different selections are available: — Input with interrupt generation on falling edges (P1.0-.3: Schmitt trigger input). — Input with interrupt generation on rising edges (P1.0-.3: Schmitt trigger input). — Input with interrupt generation on falling/rising edges (P1.0-.3: Schmitt trigger input). www.DataSheet4U.com Port 1 Interrupt Enable and Pending Registers (P1INT, P1PND) To process external interrupts at the port 1 pins, two additional control registers are provided: the port 1 interrupt enable register P1INT (E6H, set 1, bank 1) and the port 1 interrupt pending register P1PND (E7H, set 1, bank 1). The port 1 interrupt pending register P1PND lets you check for interrupt pending conditions and clear the pending condition when the interrupt service routine has been initiated. The application program detects interrupt requests by polling the P1PND register at regular intervals. When the interrupt enable bit of any port 1 pin is “1”, a rising or falling edge at that pin will generate an interrupt request. The corresponding P1PND bit is then automatically set to “1” and the IRQ level goes low to signal the CPU that an interrupt request is waiting. When the CPU acknowledges the interrupt request, application software must the clear the pending condition by writing a “0” to the corresponding P1PND bit. 9-6 S3C831B/P831B I/O PORTS Port 1 Control Register, High Byte (P1CONH) E4H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB P1.7 (INT7) P1.6 (INT6) P1.5 (INT5) P1.4 (INT4) P1CONH bit-pair pin configuration 00 01 10 11 Input mode, pull-up, interrupt on falling edge Input mode, interrupt on rising edge Input mode, interrupt on rising or falling edge Output mode, push-pull Figure 9-4. Port 1 High-Byte Control Register (P1CONH) Port 1 Control Register, Low Byte (P1CONL) E5H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB www.DataSheet4U.com .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB P1.3 (INT3) P1.2 (INT2) P1.1 (INT1) P1.0 (INT0) P1CONL bit-pair pin configuration 00 01 10 11 Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up, interrupt on falling edge Schmitt trigger input mode, interrupt on rising edge Schmitt trigger input mode, interrupt on rising or falling edge Output mode, push-pull Figure 9-5. Port 1 Low-Byte Control Register (P1CONL) 9-7 I/O PORTS S3C831B/P831B Port 1 Interrupt Control Register (P1INT) E6H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB INT7 INT6 INT5 INT4 INT3 INT2 INT1 INT0 P1INT bit configuration settings: 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt Figure 9-6. Port 1 Interrupt Control Register (P1INT) Port 1 Interrupt Pending Register (P1PND) E7H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB www.DataSheet4U.com .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB PND7 PND6 PND5 PND4 PND3 PND2 PND1 PND0 P1PND bit configuration settings: 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0 Interrupt request is pending Figure 9-7. Port 1 Interrupt Pending Register (P1PND) 9-8 S3C831B/P831B I/O PORTS PORT 2 Port 2 is an 8-bit I/O port that can be used for general-purpose I/O as A/D converter inputs, AD0–AD7. The pins are accessed directly by writing or reading the port 2 data register, P2 at location F2H in set 1, bank 1. To individually configure the port 2 pins P2.0–P2.7, you make bit-pair settings in two control registers located in set 1, bank 1: P2CONL (low byte, E9H) and P2CONH (high byte, E8H). In input mode, ADC voltage input are also available. Port 2 Control Registers Two 8-bit control registers are used to configure port 2 pins: P2CONL (E9H, set 1, Bank 1) for pins P2.0–P2.3 and P2CONH (E8H, set 1, Bank 1) for pins P2.4–P2.7. Each byte contains four bit-pairs and each bit-pair configures one port 2 pin. The P2CONH and the P2CONL registers also control the alternative functions. Port 2 Control Register, High Byte (P2CONH) E8H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB P2.4/AD4 P2.6/AD6 www.DataSheet4U.com P2.5/AD5 P2.7/AD7 P2CONH bit-pair pin configuration 00 01 10 11 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Alternative function (ADC mode) Output mode, push-pull Figure 9-8. Port 2 High-Byte Control Register (P2CONH) 9-9 I/O PORTS S3C831B/P831B Port 2 Control Register,Low Byte (P2CONL) E9H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB P2.0 (ADC0) P2.1 (ADC1) P2.2 (ADC2) P2.3 (ADC3) P2CONL bit-pair pin configuration 00 01 10 11 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Alternative function (ADC mode) Output mode, push-pull Figure 9-9. Port 2 Low-Byte Control Register (P2CONL) www.DataSheet4U.com 9-10 S3C831B/P831B I/O PORTS PORT 3 Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 3 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading the port 3 data register, P3 at location F3H in set 1, bank 1. P3.0–P3.7 can serve as inputs or as pushpull, open-drain outputs. You can configure the following alternative functions: — BUZ, SCK0, SO0, SI0, SCK1, SO1, and SI1 Port 3 Control Registers Port 3 has two 8-bit control registers: P3CONH for P3.4–P3.7 and P3CONL for P3.0–P3.3. A reset clears the P3CONH and P3CONL registers to “00H”, configuring all pins to input mode. You use control registers settings to select input or output mode, enable pull-up resistors, and enable the alternative functions. When programming this port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the port 3 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module. Port 3 Control Register, High Byte (P3CONH) EAH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB www.DataSheet4U.com P3.7 P3.6/SI1 P3.5/SO1 P3.4/SCK1 P3CONH bit-pair pin configuration settings 00 01 10 11 NOTE: Input mode (SCK1, SI1) Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (SCK1, SO1) Output mode, push-pull The SO1 and SCK1 output are selected as push-pull or open-drain by 'PG2CON'. Figure 9-10. Port 3 High-Byte Control Register (P3CONH) 9-11 I/O PORTS S3C831B/P831B Port 3 Control Register, Low Byte (P3CONL) EBH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB P3.0/BUZ P3.2/SO0 P3.3/SI0 P3CONL bit-pair pin configuration settings 00 01 10 11 NOTE: Input mode (SCK0, SI0) Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (BUZ, SCK0, SO0) Output mode, push-pull The SO0 and SCK0 output are selected as push-pull or open-drain by 'PG2CON'. P3.1/SCK0 Figure 9-11. Port 3 Low-Byte Control Register (P3CONL) www.DataSheet4U.com Port 3 Pull-up Control Register ECH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB P3.7 P3.6 P3.5 P3.4 P3.3 P3.2 P3.1 P3.0 P3PUR bit configuration settings: 0 1 NOTE: Disable pull-up resistor Enable pull-up resistor The corresponding pull-up resistor is disabled automatically, when a bit of port 3 is selected as output mode. Figure 9-12. Port 3 Pull-up Control Register (P3PUR) 9-12 S3C831B/P831B I/O PORTS PORT 4, 5 Port 4 and 5 are 8-bit I/O ports with nibble configurable pins, respectively. Port 4 and 5 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading the port 4 and 5 data registers, P4 at location F4H and P5 at location F5H in set 1, bank 1. P4.0–P4.7 and P5.0–P5.7 can serve as inputs (with or without pull-ups), as output (open drain or push-pull). And they can serve as segment pins for LCD, also. Port Group 0 Control Register Port 4 and 5 have a 8-bit control register: PG0CON.4–.7 for P4.0–P4.7 and PG0CON.0–.3 for P5.0–P5.7. A reset clears the PG0CON register to “00H”, configuring all pins to input mode. Port Group 0 Control Register EDH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB P5.4-P5.7 /SEG27-SEG24 P5.0-P5.3 /SEG31-SEG28 P4.4-P4.7 /SEG35-SEG32 www.DataSheet4U.com P4.0-P4.3 /SEG39-SEG36 PG0CON bit-pair pin configuration settings 00 01 10 11 Input mode Input mode, pull-up Output mode, open-drain Output mode, push-pull The shared I/O ports with LCD segments should be selected as one of two by LCON.3-.0. NOTE: Figure 9-13. Port Group 0 Control Register (PG0CON) 9-13 I/O PORTS S3C831B/P831B PORT 6, 7 Port 6 and 7 are 8-bit I/O port with nibble configurable pins, respectively. Port 6 and 7 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading the port 6 and 7 data registers, P6 at location F6H and P7 at location F7H in set 1, bank 1. P6.0–P6.7 and P7.0–P7.7 can serve as inputs (with or without pull-ups), as output (open drain or push-pull). And they can serve as segment pins for LCD also. Port Group 1 Control Register Port 6 and 7 have a 8-bit control register: PG1CON.4–.7 for P6.0–P6.7 and PG1CON.0–.3 for P7.0–P7.7. A reset clears the PG1CON register to “00H”, configuring all pins to input mode. Port Group 1 Control Register EEH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB P6.0-P6.3 /SEG23-SEG20 www.DataSheet4U.com P6.4-P6.7 /SEG19-SEG16 P7.4-P7.7 P7.0-P7.3 /SEG11-SEG8 /SEG15-SEG12 PG1CON bit-pair pin configuration settings 00 01 10 11 NOTE: Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Output mode, open-drain Output mode, push-pull The shared I/O ports with LCD segments should be selected as one of two LCON.3-.0. Figure 9-14. Port Group 1 Control Register (PG1CON) 9-14 S3C831B/P831B I/O PORTS PORT 8 Port 8 is an 8-bit I/O port with nibble configurable pins. Port 8 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading the port 8 data register, P8 at location F8H in set 1, bank 1. P8.0–P8.7 can serve as inputs (with or without pull-ups), as output (open drain or push-pull). And they can serve as segment pins for LCD also. Port Group 2 Control Register Port 8 has a 8-bit control register: PG2CON for P8.0–P8.7. A reset clears the PG2CON register to “00H”, configuring all pins to input mode. Port Group 2 Control Register EFH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB SIO1 output control bit: 0 = SO1, SCK1 output is selected as push-pull. 1 = SO1, SCK1 output is selected as open-drain. SIO0 output control bit: 0 = SO0, SCK0 output is selected as push-pull. 1 = SO0, SCK0 output is selected as open-drain. P8.4-P8.7 /SEG3-SEG0 P8.0-P8.3 /SEG7-SEG4 P1.0-P1.3 input enable bit: 0: Enable port 1.0-1.3 input 1: Disable port 1.0-1.3 input www.DataSheet4U.com P1.4-P1.7 input enable bit: 0: Enable port 1.4-1.7 input 1: Disable port 1.4-1.7 input PG2CON bit-pair pin configuration settings 00 01 10 11 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up Output mode, open-drain Output mode, push-pull The shared I/O ports with LCD segments should be slelected as one of two by LCON.3-.0. NOTE: Figure 9-15. Port Group 2 Control Register (PG2CON) 9-15 I/O PORTS S3C831B/P831B NOTES www.DataSheet4U.com 9-16 S3C831B/P831B BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0 10 OVERVIEW BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0 The S3C831B has two default timers: an 8-bit basic timer and one 8-bit general-purpose timer/counter. The 8-bit timer/counter is called timer 0. BASIC TIMER (BT) You can use the basic timer (BT) in two different ways: — As a watchdog timer to provide an automatic reset mechanism in the event of a system malfunction. — To signal the end of the required oscillation stabilization interval after a reset or a stop mode release. The functional components of the basic timer block are: — Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 4096, 1024, 128, or 16) with multiplexer www.DataSheet4U.com — 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT (set 1, bank 0, FDH, read-only) — Basic timer control register, BTCON (set 1, D3H, read/write) 10-1 BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0 S3C831B/P831B BASIC TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (BTCON) The basic timer control register, BTCON, is used to select the input clock frequency, to clear the basic timer counter and frequency dividers, and to enable or disable the watchdog timer function. It is located in set 1, address D3H, and is read/write addressable using Register addressing mode. A reset clears BTCON to “00H”. This enables the watchdog function and selects a basic timer clock frequency of f xx/4096. To disable the watchdog function, you must write the signature code “1010B” to the basic timer register control bits BTCON.7–BTCON.4. The 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT (set 1, bank 0, FDH), can be cleared at any time during normal operation by writing a "1" to BTCON.1. To clear the frequency dividers for all timers input clock, you write a "1" to BTCON.0. Basic TImer Control Register (BTCON) D3H, Set 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Watchdog timer enable bits: 1010B = Disable watchdog function Other value = Enable watchdog function www.DataSheet4U.com Divider clear bit: 0 = No effect 1= Clear dvider (Automatically cleared to "0") Basic timer counter clear bit: 0 = No effect 1= Clear BTCNT (Automatically cleared to "0") Basic timer input clock selection bits: 00 = fXX/4096 01 = fXX/1024 10 = fXX/128 11 = fXX/16 Figure 10-1. Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON) 10-2 S3C831B/P831B BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0 BASIC TIMER FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Watchdog Timer Function You can program the basic timer overflow signal (BTOVF) to generate a reset by setting BTCON.7–BTCON.4 to any value other than “1010B”. (The “1010B” value disables the watchdog function.) A reset clears BTCON to “00H”, automatically enabling the watchdog timer function. A reset also selects the CPU clock (as determined by the current CLKCON register setting), divided by 4096, as the BT clock. A reset whenever a basic timer counter overflow occurs. During normal operation, the application program must prevent the overflow, and the accompanying reset operation, from occurring. To do this, the BTCNT value must be cleared (by writing a "1" to BTCON.1) at regular intervals. If a system malfunction occurs due to circuit noise or some other error condition, the BT counter clear operation will not be executed and a basic timer overflow will occur, initiating a reset. In other words, during normal operation, the basic timer overflow loop (a bit 7 overflow of the 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT) is always broken by a BTCNT clear instruction. If a malfunction does occur, a reset is triggered automatically. Oscillation Stabilization Interval Timer Function You can also use the basic timer to program a specific oscillation stabilization interval following a reset or when stop mode has been released by an external interrupt. In stop mode, whenever a reset or an internal and an external interrupt occurs, the oscillator starts. The BTCNT value then starts increasing at the rate of fxx/4096 (for reset), or at the rate of the preset clock source (for an internal and an external interrupt). When BTCNT.3 overflows, a signal is generated to indicate that the stabilization interval has elapsed and to gate the clock signal off to the CPU so that it can resume normal operation. www.DataSheet4U.com In summary, the following events occur when stop mode is released: 1. During stop mode, a power-on reset or an internal and an external interrupt occurs to trigger the stop mode release and oscillation starts. 2. If a power-on reset occurred, the basic timer counter will increase at the rate of fxx/4096. If an internal and an external interrupt is used to release stop mode, the BTCNT value increases at the rate of the preset clock source. 3. Clock oscillation stabilization interval begins and continues until bit 3 of the basic timer counter overflows. 4. When a BTCNT.3 overflow occurs, normal CPU operation resumes. 10-3 BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0 S3C831B/P831B RESET or STOP Bit 1 Bits 3, 2 Data Bus fXX/4096 fXX/1024 fXX DIV fXX/128 fXX/16 R Start the CPU (note) MUX 8-Bit Up Counter (BTCNT, Read-Only) OVF RESET Clear Basic Timer Control Register (Write '1010xxxxB' to Disable) Bit 0 NOTE: During a power-on reset operation, the CPU is idle during the required oscillation stabilization interval (until bit 4 of the basic timer counter overflows). www.DataSheet4U.com Figure 10-2. Basic Timer Block Diagram 10-4 S3C831B/P831B BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0 8-BIT TIMER/COUNTER 0 Timer/counter 0 has three operating modes, one of which you select using the appropriate T0CON setting: — Interval timer mode — Capture input mode with a rising or falling edge trigger at the P0.2 pin — PWM mode Timer/counter 0 has the following functional components: — Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 1024, 256, 64, 8, or 1) with multiplexer — External clock input (P0.1, T0CLK) — 8-bit counter (T0CNT), 8-bit comparator, and 8-bit reference data register (T0DATA) — I/O pins for capture input, match output, or PWM output (P0.2/T0CAP, P0.3/T0OUT, P0.3/T0PWM) — Timer 0 overflow interrupt (IRQ0, vector E2H) and match/capture interrupt (IRQ0, vector E0H) generation — Timer 0 control register, T0CON (set 1, E2H, bank 0, read/write) TIMER/COUNTER 0 CONTROL REGISTER (T0CON) You use the timer 0 control register, T0CON, to — Select the timer 0 operating mode (interval timer, capture mode, or PWM mode) www.DataSheet4U.com — Select the timer 0 input clock frequency — Clear the timer 0 counter, T0CNT — Enable the timer 0 overflow interrupt or timer 0 match/capture interrupt — Clear timer 0 match/capture interrupt pending condition 10-5 BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0 S3C831B/P831B T0CON is located in set 1, bank 0, at address E2H, and is read/write addressable using Register addressing mode. A reset clears T0CON to “00H”. This sets timer 0 to normal interval timer mode, selects an input clock frequency of fxx/1024, and disables all timer 0 interrupts. You can clear the timer 0 counter at any time during normal operation by writing a "1" to T0CON.2. The timer 0 overflow interrupt (T0OVF) is interrupt level IRQ0 and has the vector address E2H. When a timer 0 overflow interrupt occurs and is serviced by the CPU, the pending condition is cleared automatically by hardware or must be cleared by software. To enable the timer 0 match/capture interrupt (IRQ0, vector E0H), you must write T0CON.1 to "1". To detect a match/capture interrupt pending condition, the application program polls INTPND.1. When a "1" is detected, a timer 0 match or capture interrupt is pending. When the interrupt request has been serviced, the pending condition must be cleared by software by writing a "0" to the timer 0 match/capture interrupt pending bit, INTPND.1. Timer 0 Control Register (T0CON) E2H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB www.DataSheet4U.com Timer 0 input clock selection bits: 000 = fxx/1024 001 = fxx/256 010 = fxx/64 011 = fxx/8 100 = fxx 101 = External clock (P0.1/T0CLK) falling edge 110 = External clock (P0.1/T0CLK) rising edge 111 = Counter stop Timer 0 overflow interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable overflow interrupt 1 = Enable overflow interrupt Timer 0 match/capture interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable interrupt 1 = Enable interrupt Timer 0 counter clear bit: 0 = No effect 1 = Clear the timer 0 counter (when write) Timer 0 operating mode selection bits: 00 = Interval mode (P0.3/T0OUT) 01 = Capture mode (capture on rising edge, counter running, OVF can occur) 10 = Capture mode (capture on falling edge, counter running, OVF can occur) 11 = PWM mode (OVF and match interrupt can occur) Figure 10-3. Timer 0 Control Register (T0CON) 10-6 S3C831B/P831B BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0 Timer 0 Interrupt Pending Register (INTPND) E6H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Not used Timer 0 overflow interrupt pending bit: 0 = Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write "0". 1 = Interrupt request is pending Timer 0 match/capture pending bit: 0 = Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write "0". 1 = Interrupt request is pending Figure 10-4. Timer 0 Interrupt Pending Register (INTPND) www.DataSheet4U.com 10-7 BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0 S3C831B/P831B TIMER 0 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Timer 0 Interrupts (IRQ0, Vectors E0H and E2H) The timer 0 can generate two interrupts: the timer 0 overflow interrupt (T0OVF), and the timer 0 match/ capture interrupt (T0INT). T0OVF is belongs to interrupt level IRQ0, vector E2H. T0INT also belongs to interrupt level IRQ0, but is assigned the separate vector address, E0H. A timer 0 overflow interrupt pending condition is automatically cleared by hardware when it has been serviced or should be cleared by software in the interrupt service routine by writing a “0” to the INTPND.0 interrupt pending bit. However, the timer 0 match/capture interrupt pending condition must be cleared by the application’s interrupt service routine by writing a "0" to the INTPND.1 interrupt pending bit. Interval Timer Mode In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the value written to the timer 0 reference data register, T0DATA. The match signal generates a timer 0 match interrupt (T0INT, vector E0H) and clears the counter. If, for example, you write the value "10H" to T0DATA, the counter will increment until it reaches “10H”. At this point, the timer 0 interrupt request is generated, the counter value is reset, and counting resumes. With each match, the level of the signal at the timer 0 output pin is inverted (see Figure 10-5). Capture Signal www.DataSheet4U.com Interrupt Enable/Disable T0CON.1 CLK 8-Bit Up Counter R (Clear) 8-Bit Comparator Match M U X T0INT (IRQ0) INTPND.1 Pending T0OUT (P0.3) (Match INT) Timer 0 Buffer Register Match Signal T0CON.2 T0OVF Timer 0 Data Register T0CON.4-.3 Figure 10-5. Simplified Timer 0 Function Diagram: Interval Timer Mode 10-8 S3C831B/P831B BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0 Pulse Width Modulation Mode Pulse width modulation (PWM) mode lets you program the width (duration) of the pulse that is output at the T0PWM (P0.3) pin. As in interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the value written to the timer 0 data register. In PWM mode, however, the match signal does not clear the counter. Instead, it runs continuously, overflowing at "FFH", and then continues incrementing from "00H". Although you can use the match signal to generate a timer 0 overflow interrupt, interrupts are not typically used in PWM-type applications. Instead, the pulse at the T0PWM (P0.3) pin is held to Low level as long as the reference data value is less than or equal to ( ≤ ) the counter value and then the pulse is held to High level for as long as the data value is greater than ( > ) the counter value. One pulse width is equal to tCLK × 256 (see Figure 10-6). T0CON.0 T0OVF(IRQ0) CLK 8-Bit Up Counter INTPND.0 (Overflow INT) Capture Signal Interrupt Enable/Disable T0CON.1 8-Bit Comparator Match M U X T0INT (IRQ0) INTPND.1 Pending (Match INT) T0PWM Output (P0.3) High level when data > counter, Lower level when data < counter Timer 0 Buffer Register Match Signal T0CON.2 T0OVF www.DataSheet4U.com T0CON.4-.3 Timer 0 Data Register Figure 10-6. Simplified Timer 0 Function Diagram: PWM Mode 10-9 BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0 S3C831B/P831B Capture Mode In capture mode, a signal edge that is detected at the T0CAP (P0.2) pin opens a gate and loads the current counter value into the timer 0 data register. You can select rising or falling edges to trigger this operation. Timer 0 also gives you capture input source: the signal edge at the T0CAP (P0.2) pin. You select the capture input by setting the values of the timer 0 capture input selection bits in the port 0 control register, P0CONL.5–.4, (set 1, bank 1, E1H). When P0CONL.5–.4 is "00", the T0CAP input is selected. Both kinds of timer 0 interrupts can be used in capture mode: the timer 0 overflow interrupt is generated whenever a counter overflow occurs; the timer 0 match/capture interrupt is generated whenever the counter value is loaded into the timer 0 data register. By reading the captured data value in T0DATA, and assuming a specific value for the timer 0 clock frequency, you can calculate the pulse width (duration) of the signal that is being input at the T0CAP pin (see Figure 10-7). T0CON.0 T0OVF(IRQ0) CLK 8-Bit Up Counter INTPND.0 (Overflow INT) Interrupt Enable/Disable T0CON.1 www.DataSheet4U.com T0CAP input (P0.2) T0CON.4-.3 Match Signal M U X T0INT (IRQ0) INTPND.1 Pending (Capture INT) T0CON.4-.3 Timer 0 Data Register Figure 10-7. Simplified Timer 0 Function Diagram: Capture Mode 10-10 S3C831B/P831B BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0 T0CON.0 T0CON.7-.5 Data BUS fxx/1024 fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx/1 MUX T0CLK 8 8-Bit Up Counter R (Read-Only) OVF INTPND.0 T0OVF (IRQ0) T0CON.2 Clear T0CON.1 Vss 8-Bit Comparator Match M U X Timer 0 Buffer Register T0CON.4-.3 Match signal T0CON.2 T0OVF Timer 0 Data Register www.DataSheet4U.com M U X T0INT INTPND.1 (IRQ0) T0OUT T0PWM T0CAP T0CON.4-.3 8 Data BUS Figure 10-8. Timer 0 Block Diagram 10-11 BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0 S3C831B/P831B NOTES www.DataSheet4U.com 10-12 S3C831B/P831B 8-BIT TIMER 1 11 OVERVIEW 8-BIT TIMER 1 The 8-bit timer 1 is an 8-bit general-purpose timer. Timer 1 has the interval timer mode by using the appropriate T1CON setting. Timer 1 has the following functional components: — Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 256, 64, 8 or 1) with multiplexer — External clock input (P0.4/T1CLK) — 8-bit counter (T1CNT), 8-bit comparator, and 8-bit reference data register (T1DATA) — Timer 1 interrupt (IRQ1, vector E6H) generation — Timer 1 control register, T1CON (set 1, Bank 0, E5H, read/write) FUNCTION DESCRIPTION www.DataSheet4U.com Interval Timer Function The timer 1 can generate an interrupt, the timer 1 match interrupt (T1INT). T1INT belongs to interrupt level IRQ1, and is assigned the separate vector address, E6H. The T1INT pending condition should be cleared by software when it has been serviced. Even though T1INT is disabled, the application’s service routine can detect a pending condition of T1INT by the software and execute it’s sub-routine. When this case is used, the T1INT pending bit must be cleared by the application subroutine by writing a “0” to the T1CON.0 pending bit. In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the values written to the Timer 1 reference data registers, T1DATA. The match signal generates a timer 1 match interrupt (T1INT, vector E6H) and clears the counter. If, for example, you write the value 10H to T1DATA and 0EH to T1CON, the counter will increment until it reaches 10H. At this point, the Timer 1 interrupt request is generated, the counter value is reset, and counting resumes. 11-1 8-BIT TIMER 1 S3C831B/P831B TIMER 1 CONTROL REGISTER (T1CON) You use the timer 1 control register, T1CON, to — Enable the timer 1 operating (interval timer) — Select the timer 1 input clock frequency — Clear the timer 1 counter, T1CNT — Enable the timer 1 interrupt and clear timer 1 interrupt pending condition T1CON is located in set 1, bank 0, at address E5H, and is read/write addressable using register addressing mode. A reset clears T1CON to "00H". This sets timer 1 to disable interval timer mode, and disables timer 1 interrupt. You can clear the timer 1 counter at any time during normal operation by writing a “1” to T1CON.3 To enable the timer 1 interrupt (IRQ1, vector E6H), you must write T1CON.2, and T1CON.1 to "1". To detect an interrupt pending condition when T1INT is disabled, the application program polls pending bit, T1CON.0. When a "1" is detected, a timer 1 interrupt is pending. When the T1INT sub-routine has been serviced, the pending condition must be cleared by software by writing a "0" to the timer 1 interrupt pending bit, T1CON.0. Timer 1 Control Register E5H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W www.DataSheet4U.com MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Timer 1 input clock selection bits: 000 = fxx/256 001 = fxx/64 010 = fxx/8 011 = fxx 111= External clock (T1CLK) input Not used Timer 1 counter clear bit: 0 = No affect 1 = Clear the timer 1 counter (when write) Timer 1 interrupt pending bit: 0 = No interrupt pending 0 = Clear pending bit (when write) 1 = Interrupt is pending Timer 1 interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable interrupt 1 = Enable interrupt Timer 1 count enable bit: 0 = Disable counting operation 1 = Enable counting operation Figure 11-1. Timer 1 Control Register (T1CON) 11-2 S3C831B/P831B 8-BIT TIMER 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM Bits 7, 6, 5 Data Bus T1CLK (P0.4) 8 fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx/1 X 8-bit Comparator Match Bit 2 Timer 1 Buffer Register Bit 1 M U 8-bit up-Counter (Read Only) Bit 3 R Clear Pending Bit 0 T1INT IRQ1 Counter clear signal (T1CON.3) only www.DataSheet4U.com Timer 1 Data Register (Read/Write) 8 Data Bus NOTE: To be loaded T1DATA value to buffer register for comparing, T1CON.3 bit must be set 1. Figure 11-2. Timer 1 Functional Block Diagram 11-3 8-BIT TIMER 1 S3C831B/P831B NOTES www.DataSheet4U.com 11-4 S3C831B/P831B 16-BIT TIMER 2 12 OVERVIEW 16-BIT TIMER 2 The 16-bit timer 2 is an 16-bit general-purpose timer. Timer 2 has the interval timer mode by using the appropriate T2CON setting. Timer 2 has the following functional components: — Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 256, 64, 8 or 1) with multiplexer — External clock input (T2CLK) — 16-bit counter (T2CNTH/L), 16-bit comparator, and 16-bit reference data register (T2DATAH/L) — Timer 2 interrupt (IRQ1, vector E4H) generation — Timer 2 control register, T2CON (set 1, Bank 1, FEH, read/write) FUNCTION DESCRIPTION www.DataSheet4U.com Interval Timer Function The timer 2 can generate an interrupt, the timer 2 match interrupt (T2INT). T2INT belongs to interrupt level IRQ1, and is assigned the separate vector address, E4H. The T2INT pending condition should be cleared by software when it has been serviced. Even though T2INT is disabled, the application’s service routine can detect a pending condition of T2INT by the software and execute it’s sub-routine. When this case is used, the T2INT pending bit must be cleared by the application subroutine by writing a “0” to the T2CON.0 pending bit. In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the values written to the Timer 2 reference data registers, T2DATA. The match signal generates a timer 2 match interrupt (T2INT, vector E4H) and clears the counter. If, for example, you write the value 0010H to T2DATAH/L and 0EH to T2CON, the counter will increment until it reaches 10H. At this point, the Timer 2 interrupt request is generated, the counter value is reset, and counting resumes. 12-1 16-BIT TIMER 2 S3C831B/P831B TIMER 2 CONTROL REGISTER (T2CON) You use the timer 2 control register, T2CON, to — Enable the timer 2 operating (interval timer) — Select the timer 2 input clock frequency — Clear the timer 2 counter, T2CNTH/L — Enable the timer 2 interrupt and clear timer 2 interrupt pending condition T2CON is located in set 1, bank 1, at address FEH, and is read/write addressable using register addressing mode. A reset clears T2CON to "00H". This sets timer 2 to disable interval timer mode, and disables timer 2 interrupt. You can clear the timer 2 counter at any time during normal operation by writing a “1” to T2CON.3 To enable the timer 2 interrupt (IRQ1, vector E4H), you must write T2CON.2, and T2CON.1 to "1". To detect an interrupt pending condition when T2INT is disabled, the application program polls pending bit, T2CON.0. When a "1" is detected, a timer 2 interrupt is pending. When the T2INT sub-routine has been serviced, the pending condition must be cleared by software by writing a "0" to the timer 2 interrupt pending bit, T2CON.0. Timer 2 Control Registers FEH, Set 1, Bank 1 www.DataSheet4U.com MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Timer 0 input clock selection bits: 000 = fxx/256 001 = fxx/64 010 = fxx/8 011 = fxx 111 = External clock (T2CLK) input Timer 2 interrupt pending bit: 0 = No interrupt pending 0 = Clear pending bit (when write) 1 = Interrupt is pending Timer 2 interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable interrupt 1 = Enable interrupt Timer 2 count enable bit: 0 = Disable counting operation 1 = Enable counting operation Not used Timer 2 counter clear bit: 0 = No affect 1 = Clear the timer 2 counter (when write) Figure 12-1. Timer 2 Control Register (T2CON) 12-2 S3C831B/P831B 16-BIT TIMER 2 BLOCK DIAGRAM Bits 7, 6, 5 Data Bus T2CLK (P0.6) 8 fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx/1 X 16-bit Comparator Match Bit 2 Timer 2 Buffer Register Bit 1 M U 16-bit up-Counter (Read Only) Bit 3 R Clear Pending Bit 0 T2INT IRQ1 Counter clear signal (T2CON.3) Timer 2 Data Register (Read/Write) www.DataSheet4U.com 8 Data Bus NOTE: To be loaded T2DATAH/L value to buffer register for comparing, T2CON.3 bit must be set 1. Figure 12-2. Timer 2 Functional Block Diagram 12-3 16-BIT TIMER 2 S3C831B/P831B NOTES www.DataSheet4U.com 12-4 S3C831B/P831B WATCH TIMER 13 OVERVIEW WATCH TIMER Watch timer functions include real-time and watch-time measurement and interval timing for the system clock. To start watch timer operation, set bit 6 of the watch timer control register, WTCON.6 to "1". And if you want to service watch timer overflow interrupt (IRQ3, vector F2H), then set the WTCON.1 to “1”. The watch timer overflow interrupt pending condition (WTCON.0) must be cleared by software in the application’s interrupt service routine by means of writing a "0" to the WTCON.0 interrupt pending bit. After the watch timer starts and elapses a time, the watch timer interrupt pending bit (WTCON.0) is automatically set to "1", and interrupt requests commence in 50 ms, 0.5 and 1-second intervals by setting Watch timer speed selection bits (WTCON.3 – .2). The watch timer can generate a steady 1 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 3 kHz, or 6 kHz signal to BUZ output pin for Buzzer. By setting WTCON.3 and WTCON.2 to "11b", the watch timer will function in high-speed mode, generating an interrupt every 50 ms. High-speed mode is useful for timing events for program debugging sequences. The watch timer supplies the clock frequency for the LCD controller (fLCD). Therefore, if the watch timer is disabled, the LCD controller does not operate. www.DataSheet4U.com Watch timer has the following functional components: — Real Time and Watch-Time Measurement — Using a Main System Clock Source only — Clock Source Generation for LCD Controller (fLCD ) — I/O pin for Buzzer Output Frequency Generator (P3.0, BUZ) — Timing Tests in High-Speed Mode — Watch timer overflow interrupt (IRQ3, vector F2H) generation — Watch timer control register, WTCON (set 1, bank 0, E8H, read/write) 13-1 WATCH TIMER S3C831B/P831B WATCH TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (WTCON) The watch timer control register, WTCON is used to select the watch timer interrupt time and Buzzer signal, to enable or disable the watch timer function. It is located in set 1, bank 0 at address E8H, and is read/write addressable using register addressing mode. A reset clears WTCON to "00H". This disable the watch timer. So, if you want to use the watch timer, you must write appropriate value to WTCON. Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON) E8H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Not used Watch timer Enable/Disable bit: 0 = Disable watch timer 1 = Enable watch timer Buzzer signal selection bits (When fxx=4.5 MHz): 00 = 1 kHz 01 = 1.5 kHz 10 = 3 kHz 11 = 6 kHz Watch timer interrupt pending bit: 0 = Interrupt request is not pending (Clear pending bit when write"0") 1 = Interrupt request is pending Watch timer INT Enable/Disable bit: 0 = Disable watch timer INT 1 = Enable watch timer INT Watch timer speed selection bits (When fxx=4.5 MHz): 00 = Set watch timer interrupt to 1 s 01 = Set watch timer interrupt to 0.5 s 11 = Set watch timer interrupt to 50 ms www.DataSheet4U.com NOTE: If the main clock is 9MHz, IFMOD.7 should be set to "1". Figure 13-1. Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON) 13-2 S3C831B/P831B WATCH TIMER WATCH TIMER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM BUZZER Output WTCON.5 WTCON.4 WTCON.3 WTCON.2 MUX 1 kHz 1.5 kHz 3 kHz 6 kHz WTCON.1 WTINT Selector Circuit WTCON.6 Enable/Disable WTCON.0 fxx fxx/2 MUX Frequency Divider fW 32.768 kHz 1 sec Frequency 0.5 sec Dividing 50 msec Circuit fLCD (500 Hz) IFMOD.7 www.DataSheet4U.com fXX = Main clock fW = Watch timer clock (When fxx=4.5MHz and IFMOD.7=0) = Watch timer clock (When fxx=9.0MHz and IFMOD.7=1) Figure 13-2. Watch Timer Circuit Diagram 13-3 WATCH TIMER S3C831B/P831B NOTES www.DataSheet4U.com 13-4 S3C831B/P831B LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER 14 OVERVIEW LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER The S3C831B microcontroller can directly drive an up-to-20-digit (40-segment) LCD panel. The LCD block has the following components: — LCD controller/driver — Display RAM (00H–13H) for storing display data in page 9 — 40 segment output pins (SEG0–SEG39) — Four common output pins (COM0–COM3) — Three LCD operating power supply pins (VLC0– VLC2) and bias pin for LCD driving voltage (VLCD) — LCD voltage dividing resistors Bit settings in the LCD mode register, LMOD, determine the LCD frame frequency, duty and bias, and LCD voltage dividing resistors. www.DataSheet4U.com The LCD control register LCON turns the LCD display on and off and switches current to the LCD voltage dividing resistors for the display. LCD data stored in the display RAM locations are transferred to the segment signal pins automatically without program control. Bias 1 LCD Controller/ Driver VLC0-VLC2 3 COM0-COM3 4 SEG0-SEG39 40 8-Bit Data Bus 8 Figure 14-1. LCD Function Diagram 14-1 LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER S3C831B/P831B LCD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13H.7 8 13H.6 13H.5 13H.4 MUX SEG39/P4.0 SEG38/P4.1 SEG37/P4.2 SEG36/P4.3 SEG35/P4.4 SEG34/P4.5 Segment Driver SEG16/P6.7 SEG15/P7.0 SEG14/P7.1 SEG13/P7.2 SEG12/P7.3 SEG11/P7.4 SEG0/P8.7 fLCD COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 05H.1 8 05H.0 04H.7 04H.6 MUX 00H.3 00H.2 8 00H.1 00H.0 MUX www.DataSheet4U.com 8 LMOD Timing Controller COM Control 8 LCON VLC0 LCD Voltage Control VLC1 VLC2 Bias NOTES: 1. fLCD = 500Hz, 250Hz, 125Hz, and 62.5Hz 2. The LCD display registers are in the page 9. Figure 14-2. LCD Circuit Diagram 14-2 S3C831B/P831B LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER LCD RAM ADDRESS AREA RAM addresses 00H–13H of page 9 are used as LCD data memory. When the bit value of a display segment is "1", the LCD display is turned on; when the bit value is "0", the display is turned off. Display RAM data are sent out through segment pins SEG0–SEG39 using a direct memory access (DMA) method that is synchronized with the fLCD signal. RAM addresses in this location that are not used for LCD display can be allocated to general-purpose use. SEG39 913H 912H 911H 910H 90FH 90EH 90DH 90CH 90BH 90AH 909H 908H 907H 906H 905H 904H bit 7 SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 www.DataSheet4U.com bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 903H 902H 901H 900H bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 Figure 14-3. LCD Display Data RAM Organization 14-3 LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER S3C831B/P831B LCD CONTROL REGISTER (LCON), F1H at BANK 0 of SET 1 Table 14-1. LCD Control Register (LCON) Organization LCON Bit LCON.7 Setting 0 1 Description LCD output is low and the current for dividing the resistors is cut off. If LMOD.3 = “0”, LCD display is turned off. (All LCD segments are off signal output.) If LMOD.3 = “1”, output COM and SEG signals in display mode. LCON.6–.4 Not used for the S3C831B. LCON.3–.0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 www.DataSheet4U.com Select LCD SEG0–39. Select LCD SEG0–35/P4.0–4.3 as I/O port. Select LCD SEG0–31/P4 as I/O port. Select LCD SEG0–27/P4, P5.0–P5.3 as I/O port. Select LCD SEG0–23/P4, P5 as I/O port. Select LCD SEG0–19/P4, P5, P6.0–P6.3 as I/O port. Select LCD SEG0–15/P4, P5, P6 as I/O port. Select LCD SEG0–11/P4, P5, P6, P7.0–P7.3 as I/O port. Select LCD SEG0–7/P4, P5, P6, P7 as I/O port. Select LCD SEG0–3/P4, P5, P6, P7, P8.0–P8.3 as I/O port. All I/O port (P4–P8) 14-4 S3C831B/P831B LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER LCD MODE REGISTER (LMOD) The LCD mode control register LMOD is mapped to RAM address F2H at bank 0 of set 1. LMOD controls these LCD functions: — Duty and bias selection (LMOD.3–LMOD.0) — LCDCK clock frequency selection (LMOD.5–LMOD.4) — LCD voltage dividing resistors selection (LMOD.6) — LCD common signal enable or disable selection (LMOD.7) The LCD clock signal, LCDCK, determines the frequency of COM signal scanning of each segment output. This is also referred to as the 'frame frequency.' Since LCDCK is generated by dividing the watch timer clock (fw), the watch timer must be enabled when the LCD display is turned on. RESET clears the LMOD register values to logic zero. This produces the following LCD control settings: — Display is turned off — LCDCK frequency is 62.5 Hz (at fx = 4.5 MHz) from the watch timer clock. The LCD display can continue to operate during idle mode. Table 14-2. LCD Clock Signal (LCDCK) Frame Frequency LCDCK Frequency www.DataSheet4U.com Static 62.5 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1/2 Duty 31.3 Hz 62.5 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 1/3 Duty 20.8 Hz 41.7 Hz 83.3 Hz 166.7 Hz 1/4 Duty 15.6 Hz 31.3 Hz 62.5 Hz 125 Hz 62.5 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz NOTE: fx = 4.5 MHz 14-5 LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER S3C831B/P831B Table 14-3. LCD Mode Control Register (LMOD) Organization, F2H at Bank 0 of Set 1 LMOD.7 0 1 LMOD.6 0 1 LMOD.5 0 0 1 1 Enable COM signal Disable COM signal LCD Voltage Dividing Resistors Control Bit Internal voltage dividing resistors External voltage dividing resistors; Internal voltage dividing resistors are off. LMOD.4 0 1 0 1 LCD Clock (LCDCK) Frequency (When fxx = 4.5MHz) 62.5 Hz at fx = 4.5 MHz 125 Hz at fx = 4.5 MHz 250 Hz at fx = 4.5 MHz 500 Hz at fx = 4.5 MHz COM Signal Enable/Disable Bit NOTE: If the main clock is 9.0MHz, IFMOD.7 should be set to "1". LMOD.3 0 1 www.DataSheet4U.com LMOD.2 x 0 0 0 0 1 LMOD.1 x 0 0 1 1 0 LMOD.0 x 0 1 1 0 0 Duty and Bias Selection for LCD Display LCD display off (LCD off signal output) 1/4 duty, 1/3 bias 1/3 duty, 1/3 bias 1/3 duty, 1/2 bias 1/2 duty, 1/2 bias Static 1 1 1 1 Table 14-4. Maximum Number of Display Digits per Duty Cycle LCD Duty Static 1/2 1/3 1/3 1/4 LCD Bias Static 1/2 1/2 1/3 1/3 COM Output Pins COM0 COM0–COM1 COM0–COM2 COM0–COM2 COM0–COM3 Maximum Seg Display 40 40 x 2 40 x 3 40 x 3 40 x 4 14-6 S3C831B/P831B LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER LCD DRIVE VOLTAGE The LCD display is turned on only when the voltage difference between the common and segment signals is greater than VLCD. The LCD display is turned off when the difference between the common and segment signal voltages is less than VLCD. The turn-on voltage, + VLCD or - VLCD, is generated only when both signals are the selected signals of the bias. Table 14-5 shows LCD drive voltages for static mode, 1/2 bias, and 1/3 bias. Table 14-5. LCD Drive Voltage Values LCD Power Supply VLC0 VLC1 VLC2 Vss Static Mode VLCD – – 0V 1/2 Bias VLCD 1/2 VLCD 1/2 VLCD 0V 1/3 Bias VLCD 2/3 VLCD 1/3 VLCD 0V NOTE: The LCD panel display may deteriorate if a DC voltage is applied that lies between the common and segment signal voltage. Therefore, always drive the LCD panel with AC voltage. LCD COM/SEG SIGNALS The 40 LCD segment signal pins are connected to corresponding display RAM locations at 00H–13H at page 7. The corresponding bits of the display RAM are synchronized with the common signal output pins COM0, COM1, COM2, and COM3. www.DataSheet4U.com When the bit value of a display RAM location is "1", a select signal is sent to the corresponding segment pin. When the display bit is "0", a 'no-select' signal is sent to the corresponding segment pin. Each bias has select and no-select signals. Select Non-Select FR 1 Frame COM VLC0 VSS VLC0 VSS VLC0 VSS -VLC0 SEG COM-SEG Figure 14-4. Select/No-Select Bias Signals in Static Display Mode 14-7 LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER S3C831B/P831B Select Non-Select FR 1 Frame VLC0 COM VLC1,2 Vss VLC0 VLC1,2 Vss VLC0 VLC1,2 Vss -VLC1,2 -VLC0 SEG COM-SEG Figure 14-5. Select/No-Select Bias Signals in 1/2 Duty, 1/2 Bias Display Mode www.DataSheet4U.com Select Non-Select FR 1 Frame VLC0 COM VSS VLC0 SEG VSS VLC0 COM-SEG VSS -VLC0 Figure 14-6. Select/No-Select Bias Signals in 1/3 Duty, 1/3 Bias Display Mode 14-8 S3C831B/P831B LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER Static and 1/3 Bias (VLCD = 3 V at VDD = 5 V) 1/2 Bias (VLCD = 2.5 V at VDD = 5 V) VDD LCON.7 Bias Pin VLC0 VLC1 VLCD = 3 V VLC2 2R R R R VSS VLCD = 2.5 V VDD LCON.7 Bias Pin VLC0 VLC1 VLC2 2R R R R U VSS Static and 1/3 Bias (VLCD = 5 V at VDD = 5 V) www.DataSheet4U.com Voltage Dividing Resistors Adjustment VDD LCON.7 Bias Pin VLC0 VLC1 VLCD = 5 V VLC2 2R R R R VSS VLCD VDD LCON.7 Bias Pin VLC0 VLC1 VLC2 2R R R R VSS VLCD = 3 R' × VDD R'' + 3R' , when LMOD.6 = "1" R'' R' R' R' NOTES: 1. R = Internal voltage dividing resistors. These resistors can be disconnected by LMOD.6. 2. R' = External Resistors 3. R'' = External Resistor to adjust VLCD. Figure 14-7. Voltage Dividing Resistor Circuit Diagram 14-9 LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER S3C831B/P831B NOTES www.DataSheet4U.com 14-10 S3C831B/P831B 8-BIT ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER 15 OVERVIEW 8-BIT ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER The 8-bit A/D converter (ADC) module uses successive approximation logic to convert analog levels entering at one of the eight input channels to equivalent 8-bit digital values. The analog input level must lie between the AVDD and VSS values. The A/D converter has the following components: — Analog comparator with successive approximation logic — D/A converter logic (resistor string type) — ADC control register (ADCON) — Eight multiplexed analog data input pins (AD0–AD7) — 8-bit A/D conversion data output register (ADDATA) — 8-bit digital input port (Alternately, I/O port.) — AVDD pin is internally connected to VDD. www.DataSheet4U.com FUNCTION DESCRIPTION To initiate an analog-to-digital conversion procedure, at first you must set with alternative function for ADC input enable at port 2, the pin set with alternative function can be used for ADC analog input. And you write the channel selection data in the A/D converter control register ADCON.4–.6 to select one of the eight analog input pins (AD0–7) and set the conversion start or enable bit, ADCON.0. The read-write ADCON register is located in set 1, bank 0, at address EFH. The pins which are not used for ADC can be used for normal I/O. During a normal conversion, ADC logic initially sets the successive approximation register to 80H (the approximate half-way point of an 8-bit register). This register is then updated automatically during each conversion step. The successive approximation block performs 8-bit conversions for one input channel at a time. You can dynamically select different channels by manipulating the channel selection bit value (ADCON.6–4) in the ADCON register. To start the A/D conversion, you should set the enable bit, ADCON.0. When a conversion is completed, ADCON.3, the end-of-conversion(EOC) bit is automatically set to 1 and the result is dumped into the ADDATA register where it can be read. The A/D converter then enters an idle state. Remember to read the contents of ADDATA before another conversion starts. Otherwise, the previous result will be overwritten by the next conversion result. NOTE Because the A/D converter has no sample-and-hold circuitry, it is very important that fluctuation in the analog level at the AD0–AD7 input pins during a conversion procedure be kept to an absolute minimum. Any change in the input level, perhaps due to noise, will invalidate the result. If the chip enters to STOP or IDLE mode in conversion process, there will be a leakage current path in A/D block. You must use STOP or IDLE mode after ADC operation is finished. 15-1 8-BIT ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER S3C831B/P831B www.DataSheet4U.com 15-2 S3C831B/P831B 8-BIT ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER CONVERSION TIMING The A/D conversion process requires 5 steps (5 clock edges) to convert each bit and 10 clocks to set-up A/D conversion. Therefore, total of 50 clocks are required to complete an 8-bit conversion: When fxx/8 is selected for conversion clock with an 4.5 MHz fxx clock frequency, one clock cycle is 1.78 us. Each bit conversion requires 5 clocks, the conversion rate is calculated as follows: 5 clocks/bit × 8 bits + set-up time = 50 clocks, 50 clock × 1.78 us = 89 us at 0.56 MHz (4.5 MHz/8) Note that A/D converter needs at least 25µs for conversion time. A/D CONVERTER CONTROL REGISTER (ADCON) The A/D converter control register, ADCON, is located at address EFH in set 1, bank 0. It has three functions: — Analog input pin selection (bits 4, 5, and 6) — End-of-conversion status detection (bit 3) — ADC clock selection (bits 2 and 1) — A/D operation start or enable (bit 0 ) After a reset, the start bit is turned off. You can select only one analog input channel at a time. Other analog input pins (AD0–AD7) can be selected dynamically by manipulating the ADCON.4–6 bits. And the pins not used for analog input can be used for normal I/O function. www.DataSheet4U.com A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON) EFH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W (EOC bit is read-only) MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Always logic zero A/D input pin selection bits: .6 .5 .4 A/D input pin 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 ADC0 ADC1 ADC2 ADC3 ADC4 ADC5 ADC6 ADC7 Start or enable bit 0 = Disable operation 1 = Start operation Clock Selection bit: .2.1 Conversion CLK 00 fXX/16 01 fXX/8 10 fXX/4 11 fXX/1 End-of-conversion bit 0 = Not complete Conversion 1 = complete Conversion Figure 15-1. A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON) 15-3 8-BIT ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER S3C831B/P831B Conversion Data Register ADDATA F0H, Set 1, Bank 0, Read Only MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Figure 15-2. A/D Converter Data Register (ADDATA) INTERNAL REFERENCE VOLTAGE LEVELS In the ADC function block, the analog input voltage level is compared to the reference voltage. The analog input level must remain within the range VSS to AVDD (The AVDD pin is internally connected with VDD). Different reference voltage levels are generated internally along the resistor tree during the analog conversion process for each conversion step. The reference voltage level for the first conversion bit is always 1/2 AVDD. BLOCK DIAGRAM ADCON.2-.1 ADCON.4-6 (Select one input pin of the assigned pins) www.DataSheet4U.com Clock Selector ADCON.0 (AD/C Enable) M Input Pins AD0-AD7 (P2.0-P2.7) Analog Comparator Successive Approximation Logic & Register To ADCON.3 (EOC Flag) . . . U + X ADCON.0 (AD/C Enable) Upper 8-bit is loaded to A/D Conversion Data Register P2CONH/L (Assign Pins to ADC Input) 8-bit D/A Converter AVDD VSS Conversion Result (ADDATA F0H, Set 1, Bank 0) Figure 15-3. A/D Converter Functional Block Diagram 15-4 S3C831B/P831B 8-BIT ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER VDD Reference Voltage Input (It is the same voltage with VDD only.) Analog Input Pin C 101 AVDD 10 µF + C 103 VDD AD0-AD7 S3C831B VSS Figure 15-4. Recommended A/D Converter Circuit for Highest Absolute Accuracy www.DataSheet4U.com 15-5 S3C831B/P831B SERIAL I/O INTERFACE 16 OVERVIEW — Clock selector logic SERIAL I/O INTERFACE Serial I/O modules, SIO0 and SIO1 can interface with various types of external device that require serial data transfer. The components of SIO0 and SIO1 function block are: — 8-bit control register (SIO0CON, SIO1CON) — 8-bit data buffer (SIO0DATA, SIO1DATA) — 8-bit prescaler (SIO0PS, SIO1PS) — 3-bit serial clock counter — Serial data I/O pins (SI0, SO0, SI1, SO1) — Serial clock input/output pins (SCK0, SCK1) — Serial data and clock output type selection (PG2CON.7–.6) www.DataSheet4U.com The SIO modules can transmit or receive 8-bit serial data at a frequency determined by its corresponding control register settings. To ensure flexible data transmission rates, you can select an internal or external clock source. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE To program the SIO modules, follow these basic steps: 1. Configure the I/O pins at port (SCK0/SI0/SO0, SCK1/SI1/SO1) by loading the appropriate value to the P3CONH and P3CONL register if necessary. 2. Configure the output type (SCK0/SO0, SCK1/SO1) by manipulating PG2CON.7–.6 if necessary. 3. Load an 8-bit value to the SIO0CON and SIO1CON control registers to properly configure the serial I/O modules. In this operation, SIO0CON.2 and SIO1CON.2 must be set to "1" to enable the data shifters, respectively. 4. For interrupt generation, set the serial I/O interrupt enable bits (SIO0CON.1, SIO1CON.1) to "1", respectively. 5. When you transmit data to the serial buffer, write data to SIO0DATA or SIO1DATA and set SIO0CON.3 or SIO1CON.3 to 1, the shift operation starts. 6. When the shift operation (transmit/receive) is completed, the SIO0 and SIO1 pending bits (SIO0CON.0 and SIO1CON.0) are set to "1" and SIO interrupt requests are generated, respectively. 16-1 SERIAL I/O INTERFACE S3C831B/P831B SIO0 AND SIO1 CONTROL REGISTERS (SIO0CON, SIO1CON) The control registers for serial I/O interface modules, SIO0CON, is located at E9H and SIO1CON, is located at ECH in set 1, bank 0. They have the control settings for SIO modules, respectively. — Clock source selection (internal or external) for shift clock — Interrupt enable — Edge selection for shift operation — Clear 3-bit counter and start shift operation — Shift operation (transmit) enable — Mode selection (transmit/receive or receive-only) — Data direction selection (MSB first or LSB first) A reset clears the SIO0CON and SIO1CON values to "00H". This configures the corresponding modules with an internal clock source at the SCK0 and SCK1, selects receive-only operating mode, and clears the 3-bit counter, respectively. The data shift operation and the interrupt are disabled. The selected data direction is MSB-first. Serial I/O Module Control Register (SIO0CON) E9H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W www.DataSheet4U.com MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB SIO0 shift clock selection bit: 0 = Internal clock (P.S Clock) 1 = External clock (SCK0) SIO0 interrupt pending bit: 0 = No interrupt pending 0 = Clear pending condition (when write) 1 = Interrupt is pending SIO0 interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable SIO0 interrupt 1 = Enable SIO0 interrupt SIO0 shift operation enable bit: 0 = Disable shifter and clock counter 1 = Enable shifter and clock counter SIO0 counter clear and shift start bit: 0 = No action 1 = Clear 3-bit counter and start shifting Data direction control bit: 0 = MSB-first mode 1 = LSB-first mode SIO0 mode selection bit: 0 = Receive only mode 1 = Transmit/receive mode Shift clock edge selection bit: 0 = tX at falling edeges, rx at rising edges. 1 = tX at rising edeges, rx at falling edges. NOTE: It is selected SCK0 and SO0 output type (push-pull or open-drain) by PG2CON.6. Figure 16-1. Serial I/O Module Control Register (SIO0CON) 16-2 S3C831B/P831B SERIAL I/O INTERFACE Serial I/O Module Control Register (SIO1CON) ECH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB SIO1 shift clock selection bit: 0 = Internal clock (P.S Clock) 1 = External clock (SCK1) SIO1 interrupt pending bit: 0 = No interrupt pending 0 = Clear pending condition (when write) 1 = Interrupt is pending SIO1 interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable SIO0 interrupt 1 = Enable SIO0 interrupt SIO1 shift operation enable bit: 0 = Disable shifter and clock counter 1 = Enable shifter and clock counter SIO1 counter clear and shift start bit: 0 = No action 1 = Clear 3-bit counter and start shifting Data direction control bit: 0 = MSB-first mode 1 = LSB-first mode SIO1 mode selection bit: 0 = Receive only mode 1 = Transmit/receive mode Shift clock edge selection bit: 0 = tX at falling edeges, rx at rising edges. 1 = tX at rising edeges, rx at falling edges. NOTE: www.DataSheet4U.com It is selected SCK1 and SO1 output type (push-pull or open-drain) by PG2CON.7. Figure 16-2. Serial I/O Module Control Register (SIO1CON) 16-3 SERIAL I/O INTERFACE S3C831B/P831B SIO0 AND SIO1 PRE-SCALER REGISTER (SIO0PS, SIO1PS) The prescaler registers for serial I/O interface modules, SIO0PS and SIO1PS, are located at EBH and EEH in set 1, bank 0, respectively. The values stored in the SIO0 and SIO1 pre-scale registers, SIO0PS and SIO1PS, lets you determine the SIO0 and SIO1 clock rate (baud rate) as follows, respectively: Baud rate = Input clock (fxx/4)/(Pre-scaler value + 1), or SCK0 and SCK1 input clock. SIO0 Pre-scaler Register (SIO0PS) EBH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Baud rate = (fXX/4)/(SIO0PS + 1) Figure 16-3. SIO0 Pre-scaler Register (SIO0PS) www.DataSheet4U.com SIO1 Pre-scaler Register (SIO1PS) EEH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Baud rate = (fXX/4)/(SIO1PS + 1) Figure 16-4. SIO1 Pre-scaler Register (SIO1PS) 16-4 S3C831B/P831B SERIAL I/O INTERFACE SIO0 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3-Bit Counter Clear SIO0 INT SIO0CON.0 Pending SIO0CON.3 SIO0CON.7 SIO0CON.4 (Edge Select) SCK0 SIO0PS (EBH, bank 0) fxx/2 8-bit P.S. 1/2 M U X CLK 8-Bit SIO0 Shift Buffer (SIO0DATA, EAH, bank 0) SIO0CON.6 (LSB/MSB First Mode Select) SIO0CON.2 (Shift Enable) SIO0CON.1 (Interrupt Enable) IRQ2 CLK SIO0CON.5 (Mode Select) SO0 8 SI0 Data Bus Figure 16-5. SIO0 Functional Block Diagram www.DataSheet4U.com CLK 3-Bit Counter Clear SIO1 INT SIO1CON.0 Pending IRQ2 SIO1CON.3 SIO1CON.7 SIO1CON.4 (Edge Select) SCK1 SIO1PS (EEH, bank 0) fxx/2 8-bit P.S. 1/2 M U X CLK 8-Bit SIO1 Shift Buffer (SIO1DATA, EDH, bank 0) SIO1CON.2 (Shift Enable) SIO1CON.1 (Interrupt Enable) SIO1CON.5 (Mode Select) SO1 SIO1CON.6 (LSB/MSB First Mode Select) 8 SI1 Data Bus Figure 16-6. SIO1 Functional Block Diagram 16-5 SERIAL I/O INTERFACE S3C831B/P831B SERIAL I/O TIMING DIAGRAM (SIO0, SIO1) SCK0/SCK1 SI0/SI1 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 DI0 SO0/SO1 DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0 IRQ2 Set SIO0CON.3 or SIO1CON.3 Transmit Complete Figure 16-7. Serial I/O Timing in Transmit/Receive Mode (Tx at falling, SIO0CON.4 or SIO1CON.4 = 0) www.DataSheet4U.com SCK0/SCK1 SI0/SI1 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 DI0 SO0/SO1 DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0 IRQ2 Set SIO0CON.3 or SIO1CON.3 Transmit Complete Figure 16-8. Serial I/O Timing in Transmit/Receive Mode (Tx at rising, SIO0CON.4 or SIO1CON.4 = 1) 16-6 S3C831B/P831B LOW VOLTAGE RESET 17 OVERVIEW — LVREN pin — LVRSEL pin — Voltage divider — Comparator — Glitch filter LOW VOLTAGE RESET The low voltage reset block is useful for an system reset under the specific voltage of system. The components of LVR block are: — Reference voltage generator LVREN PIN www.DataSheet4U.com A LVREN pin is used to enable or disable LVR function. The LVR function is disabled when the LVREN pin is connected to VSS and is enabled when the LVREN pin is connected to VDD. LVRSEL PIN A LVRSEL pin is used to select the criterion voltage of Low Voltage reset. The criterion voltage is typical 3.7V for LVR when the pin is connected to VSS and is typical 2.4V for LVR when the pin is connected to VDD. BLOCK DIAGRAM LVREN Start Up Reference Voltage Generator Comparator Glitch Filter RESET LVRSEL Voltage Divider Figure 17-1. Low Voltage Reset Block Diagram 17-1 LOW VOLTAGE RESET S3C831B/P831B NOTES www.DataSheet4U.com 17-2 S3C831B/P831B PLL FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER 18 OVERVIEW PLL FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER The phase locked loop (PLL) frequency synthesizer locks medium frequency (MF), high frequency (HF), and very high frequency (VHF) signals to a fixed frequency using a phase difference comparison system. As shown in Figure 18-1, the PLL frequency synthesizer consists of an input selection circuit, programmable divider, phase detector, reference frequency generator, and a charge pump. PLLMOD PLLMOD.6 PLLMOD.7 and .4 VCOFM www.DataSheet4U.com PLLD (16-bit) 4 12 NF Input Circuit Prescaler Swallow Counter VCOAM Input Circuit 3-Bit Counter Selector Programmable Counter Phase Comparator Charge Pump EO0 EO1 PLLMOD.7 and .4 Reference Frequency Generator Unlock Detector PLLREF ULFG Figure 18-1. Block Diagram of the PLL Frequency Synthesizer 18-1 PLL FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER S3C831B/P831B PLL FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER FUNCTION The PLL frequency synthesizer divides the signal frequency at the VCOAM or VCOFM pin using the programmable divider. It then outputs the phase difference between the divided frequency and reference frequency at the EO0 and EO1 pin. NOTE The PLL frequency synthesizer operates only when the CE pin is High level. When the CE pin is Low level, the synthesizer is disable. Input Selection Circuit The input selection circuit consists of the VCOAM pin and VCOFM pins, an FM/AM selector, and two amplifiers. The input selection circuit selects the frequency division method and the input pin of the PLL frequency. You can choose one of two frequency division methods using the PLL mode register: 1) direct frequency division method, or 2) pulse swallow method. The PLL mode register is also used to select the VCOAM or VCOFM pin as the frequency input pin. Programmable Divider The programmable divider divides the frequency of the signal from the VCOAM and VCOFM pins in accordance with the values contained in the swallow counter and programmable counter. The programmable divider consists of prescalers, a swallow counter, and a programmable counter. When the PLL operation starts, the contents of the PLL data registers (PLLD0–PLLD1) and the NF bit in the PLLMOD register are automatically loaded into the 12-bit programmable counter and the 5-bit swallow counter. When the 12-bit programmable down counter reaches zero, the contents of the data register are automatically reloaded into the programmable counter and the swallow counter for the next counting operation. If you modify the data register value while the PLL is operating, the new values are not immediately loaded into the two counters; the new data are loaded into the two counters when the current count operation has been completed. The contents of the data register undetermined after initial power-on. However, the data register retains its current value when the reset operation is initiated by an external reset or a change in level at the CE pin. The swallow counter is a 5-bit binary down counter; the programmable counter is a 12-bit binary down counter. The swallow counter is for FM mode only. The swallow counter and programmable counter start counting down simultaneously. When the swallow counter starts counting down, the 1/33 prescaler is selected. When the swallow counter reaches zero, it stop operation and selects the 1/32 prescaler. www.DataSheet4U.com 18-2 S3C831B/P831B PLL FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER PLL DATA REGISTER (PLLD) The frequency division value of the swallow counter and programmable counter is set in the PLL data register (PLLD0-PLLD1). PLL data register configuration is shown in Figure 18-2. Programmable Counter (Upper 12 bits) 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 Swallow Counter (Lower 5 bits) 4 3 2 1 0 PLLD b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PLLD1 (F6H, Bank 0, Set 1) PLLD0 (F7H, Bank 0, Set 1) PLLMOD.5 (NF) www.DataSheet4U.com Figure 18-2. PLL Register Configuration Direct Frequency Division and Pulse Swallow Formulas In the direct frequency division method, the upper 12 bits are valid. In the pulse swallow method, all 16 bits are valid. The upper 12 bit are set in the programmable counter and the lower 4 bits and the NF bit are set in the swallow counter. The frequency division formulas for both methods, as set in the PLL data register, are shown below: — Direct frequency division (AM) is fR = fR = fVCOAM (When PLLMOD.7 and PLLMOD.4 are set to logic "00".) N fVCOAM 8xN (When PLLMOD.7 and PLLMOD.4 are set to logic "01".) Where the frequency division value (N) is 12 bits; fVCOAM = input frequency at the VCOAM pin — Pulse swallow system is (AM) fR = (FM) fR = fVCOAM (When PLLMOD.7 and PLLMOD.4 are set to logic "10".) (N×32+M) fVCOFM (When PLLMOD.7 and PLLMOD.4 are set to logic "11".) (N×32+M) where the frequency division values (N and M) are 12 bits and 5 bits, respectively; fVCOFM = input frequency at the VCOFM pin. 18-3 PLL FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER S3C831B/P831B REFERENCE FREQUENCY GENERATOR The reference frequency generator produce reference frequency which are then compared by the phase comparator. As shown in Figure 18-3, the reference frequency generator divides a crystal oscillation frequency of 4.5 MHz and generates the reference frequency (fR) for the PLL frequency synthesizer. Using the PLLREF register, you can select from ten different reference frequencies. Data Bus 8 PLLREF 4 fxx www.DataSheet4U.com 4.5 MHz 1/2 IFMOD.7 Frequency Divider 1 kHz 3 kHz 5 kHz 6.25 kHz Selector 50 kHz 100 kHz To Phase Detector Figure 18-3. Reference Frequency Generator 18-4 S3C831B/P831B PLL FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER PLL MODE REGISTER (PLLMOD) The PLL mode register (PLLMOD) is used to start and stop PLL operation and to enable or disable 3-bit counter for FVCOAM. PLLMOD values also determine the frequency dividing method. PLLMOD PLLMOD.7 PLLMOD.6 NF PLLMOD.4 PLLMOD.3 PLLMOD.2 PLLMOD.1 PLLMOD.0 PLLMOD.7 selects the frequency dividing method. The basic configuration for the two frequency dividing methods are as follows: Direct Method — Used for AM mode — Swallow counter is not used — VCOAM pin is selected for input — Selectable 3-bit counter (PLLMOD.7 and .4) Pulse Swallow Method — Used for AM, FM mode — Swallow counter is used — VCOFM pin is selected for input www.DataSheet4U.com The input frequency at the VCOAM or VCOFM pin is divided by the programmable divider. The frequency division value of the programmable divider is written to the PLL data register. When the pulse swallow method is selected by setting PLLMOD.7 and PLLMOD.4, the input signal is first divided by a 1/32 or 1/33 prescaler and the divided frequency is input to the programmable divider. Table 18-1 shows PLLMOD organization. 18-5 PLL FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER S3C831B/P831B Table 18-1. PLLMOD Organization PLL Enable and INTIF/INTCE Interrupt Control Bits PLLMOD.6 PLLMOD.3 PLLMOD.2 0 1 0 1 0 1 PLLMOD.1 PLLMOD.0 0 1 0 1 Disable PLL. Enable PLL. Disable INTIF interrupt. Enable INTIF interrupt. INTIF interrupt is not pending (when read).; Clear INTIF pending bit (when write). INTIF interrupt is pending (when read). Disable INTCE interrupt requests at CE pin. Enable INTCE interrupt requests at CE pin. INTCE interrupt is not pending (when read).; Clear INTCE pending bit (when write). INTCE interrupt is pending (when read). Frequency Division Method Selection Bit PLLMOD.7 and PLLMOD.4 0 www.DataSheet4U.com Frequency Division Method Direct method for AM Enable 3-bit counter for AM Pulse swallow method for AM Pulse swallow method for FM Selected Pin Input Voltage 300mVPP 300mVPP 300mVPP 300mVPP Input Frequency 0.5–30 MHz 0.5–30 MHz 0.5–30 MHz 30–150MHz Division Value 0 1 0 1 VCOAM selected; VCOFM pulled Low VCOAM selected; VCOFM pulled Low VCOAM selected; VCOFM pulled Low VCOFM selected; VCOAM pulled Low 16 to (216–1) 16 to (216–2) 210 to (218–2) 210 to (218–2) 0 1 1 NOTE: The NF bit, a one-bit frequency division value, is written to bit 0 in the swallow counter. 18-6 S3C831B/P831B PLL FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER PLL REFERENCE FREQUENCY SELECTION REGISTER (PLLREF) The PLL reference frequency selection register (PLLREF) used to determine the reference frequency. You can select one of ten reference frequencies by setting bits PLLREF.3-PLLREF.0 to the appropriate value. PLLREF PLLREF.7 PLLREF.6 PLLREF.5 PLLREF.4 PLLREF.3 PLLREF.2 PLLREF.1 PLLREF.0 You can select one of the reference frequencies by setting bits PLLREF.3–PLLREF.0. Table 18-2. PLLREF Register Organization (When fxx = 4.5 MHz) PLLREF.3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 www.DataSheet4U.com PLLREF.2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 PLLREF.1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 PLLREF.0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Reference Frequency Selection Select 1 kHz as reference frequency Select 3 kHz as reference frequency Select 5 kHz as reference frequency Select 6.25 kHz as reference frequency Select 9 kHz as reference frequency Select 10 kHz as reference frequency Select 12.5 kHz as reference frequency Select 25 kHz as reference frequency Select 50 kHz as reference frequency Select 100 kHz as reference frequency 1 NOTE: If the main clock is 9MHz, IFMOD.7 should be set to "1". 18-7 PLL FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER S3C831B/P831B PHASE DETECTOR, CHARGE PUMP, AND UNLOCK DETECTOR The phase comparator compare the phase difference between divided frequency (fN) output from the programmable divider and the reference frequency (fR) output from the reference frequency generator. The charge pump outputs the phase comparator's output from error output pins EO0 and EO1. The relation between the error output pin, divided frequency fN, and reference frequency fR is shown below: f R > fN = Low level output f R < fN = High level output f R = fN = Floating level A PLL operation starts when a value is loaded to the PLLMOD register, The PLL unlock flag (ULFG) in the PLL reference register, PLLREF, provides status information regarding the reference frequency and divided frequency. The unlock detector detects the unlock state of the PLL frequency synthesizer. The unlock flag in the PLLREF register is set to “1” in an unlock state. When ULFG = “0”, the PLL locked state is selected. PLLREF.7–.4 ULFG CEFG IFCFG POFG F9H at bank 0 of set 1 The ULFG flag is set continuously at a period of reference frequency fR by the unlock detector. You must therefore read the ULFG flag in the PLLREF register at periods longer than 1/fR of the reference frequency. www.DataSheet4U.com ULFG is reset wherever it is read. PLL operation is controlled by the state of the CE (chip enable) pin. The PLL frequency synthesizer is disabled and the error output pin is set to floating state whenever the CE pin is Low. When CE pin is High level, the PLL operates normally. The chip enable flag in the PLLREF register, CEFG, provides the status of the current level of the CE pin. Whenever the state of the CE pin goes from Low to High, the CEFG flag is set to “1” and a CE reset operation occurs. When the CE pin goes from High to Low, the CEFG flag is cleared to “0” and a CE interrupt is generated. The power on flag in the PLLREF register, POFG, is set by initiated power-on reset, but it is not set when a reset occurs on the normal operation. The POFG flag is cleared to “0” by writing “0” to POFG flag bit in PLLREF. 18-8 S3C831B/P831B PLL FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER USING THE PLL FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER This section describes the steps you should follow when using the PLL direct frequency division method and the pulse swallow method. In each case, you must make the following selections in this order: 1. Frequency division method: 2. Input pin: 3. Reference frequency: 4. Frequency division value: Direct Frequency Division Method Select the direct frequency division method by writing a “0” to PLLMOD.7 and PLLMOD.4. The VCOAM pin is configured for input when you select the direct frequency division method. Select the reference frequency by writing the appropriate values to the PLLREF register. The frequency division value is N= fVCOAM fVCOAM (When PLLMOD.7 and PLLMOD.4 = 00), N = 8 x f (When PLLMOD.7 and PLLMOD.4 = 01) fR R Direct frequency division and enable 3-bit counter (AM) or pulse swallow (AM, FM) VCOAM or VCOFM fR N where fVCOAM is the input frequency at the VCOAM pin, and fR is the reference frequency. www.DataSheet4U.com Example (When PLLMOD.7 and PLLMOD.4 = 00): The following data are used to receive an AM-band broadcasting station: Receive frequency: Reference frequency: Intermediate frequency: 1422 kHz 9 kHz + 450 kHz The frequency division value N is calculated as follows: N= fVCOAM (1422+450)×103 = = 208 (decimal) fR 9×103 = 0D0H (hexadecimal) You would modify the PLL data register and PLLMOD.7–.4 register as follows: PLLD1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 D 0 1 0 0 0 0 PLLD0 0 x x x x PLMOD.7-.4 0 1 x NF 0 NOTE: In the direct method, the contents of PLLD0.3-PLLD0.0 and NF are not evaluated. 18-9 PLL FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER S3C831B/P831B Pulse Swallow Method 1. Select the pulse swallow method by writing a “1” to PLLMOD.7 and PLLMOD.4. 2. The VCOFM pin is configured for input when you select the pulse swallow method. 3. Select the reference frequency by writing the appropriate value to the PLLREF register. 4. Calculate the frequency division value as follows: fVCOFM (When PLLMOD.7 and PLLMOD.4 = 11), fR fVCOAM 32N + M = f (When PLLMOD.7 and PLLMOD.4 = 10) R 32N + M = where fVCOFM is the input frequency at the VCOFM pin, and fR is the reference frequency, N is the quotient of fVCOFM fVCOFM 32fR and M is the remainder of 32fR . Example (When PLLMOD.7 and PLLMOD.4 = 11): The following data are used to receive an FM-band broadcasting station: Receive frequency: Reference frequency: Intermediate frequency: www.DataSheet4U.com 100.0 MHz 25 kHz 10.7 MHz The frequency division value N and M are calculated as follows: fVCOFM (100.0 + 10.7) × 106 = = 4428 = 138 × 32 + 12 fR 25 × 103 N = 138 (decimal) = 8AH (hexadecimal) M = 12 (decimal) = 0C (hexadecimal) You would modify the PLL data register and PLLMOD.7–.4 register as follows: PLLD1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 8 0 0 1 0 A 1 PLLD0 0 0 0 1 1 C 0 0 PLLMOD.7-.4 1 1 0 NF 1 18-10 S3C831B/P831B INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY COUNTER 19 OVERVIEW INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY COUNTER The S3C831B uses an intermediate frequency counter (IFC) to counter the frequency of the AM or FM signal at FMIF or AMIF pin. The IFC block consists of a 1/2 divider, gate control circuit, IFC mode register (IFMOD) and a 16-bit binary counter. The gate control circuit, which controls the frequency counting time, is programmed using the IFMOD register. Four different gate times can be selected using IFMOD register settings. During gate time, the 16-bit IFC counts the input frequency at the FMIF or AMIF pins. The FMIF or AMIF pin input signal for the 16-bit counter is selected using IFMOD register settings. The 16-bit binary counter (IFCNT1-IFCNT0) can be read by 8-bit register addressing mode only. When the FMIF pin input signal is selected, the signal is divided by two. When the AMIF pin input signal is directly connected to the IFC, it is not divided. By setting IFMOD register, the gate is opened for 2-ms, 8-ms, or 16-ms periods. During the open period of the gate, input frequency is counted by the 16-bit counter. When the gate is closed, the counting operation is complete, and an interrupt is generated. www.DataSheet4U.com FMIF 1/2 Divider Selector IF Counter (16 bit) 8 Gate Control Circuit 2 ms 8 ms 16 ms Gate Signal Generator Data Bus IRQ7 AMIF IFMOD 3 2 1 0 Data Bus 1kHz Internal Signal (When fxx = 4.5 MHz) NOTE: If the main clock is 9MHz, IFMOD.7 should be set to "1". Figure 19-1. IF Counter Block Diagram 19-1 INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY COUNTER S3C831B/P831B IFC MODE REGISTER (IFMOD) The IFC mode register (IFMOD) is a 8-bit register that is used to select the input pin, divider for VCOFM input frequency, PLL/IPC operation voltage, clock divider for PLL/IFC/WT, and gate time. Setting IFMOD register reset IFC value and IFC gate flag value, and starts IFC operation. IFMOD IFMOD.7 IFMOD.6 IFMOD.5 IFMOD.4 IFMOD.3 IFMOD.2 IFMOD.1 IFMOD.0 F3H at bank 0 of set 1 IFC operation starts when you select AMIF or FMIF as the IFC input pin. A reset operation clears all IFMOD values to "0". Table 19-1. IFMOD Organization PLL Frequency Synthesizer, If Counter, Watch Timer Clock Control Bit IFMOD.7 0 1 PLL, IFC, Watch Timer Clock Setting The fxx is not divided for PLL/IFC/WT clock. The fxx is divided by 2 for PLL/IFC/WT clock. The PLL/IFC Operation Voltage Selection Bit IFMOD.4 0 www.DataSheet4U.com Operation Voltage Selection for PLL/IFC Select the PLL/IFC operation voltage as 4.5V to 5,5V Select the PLL/IFC operation voltage as 2.5V to 3,5V 1 19-2 S3C831B/P831B INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY COUNTER Table 19-1. IFMOD Organization (Continued) Pin Selection Bits IFMOD.3 0 0 1 1 IFMOD.2 0 1 0 1 Effect of Control Setting IFC is disabled; FMIF/AMIF are pulled down and FMIF/AMIF's feed-back resistor are off. Enable IFC operation; AMIF pin is selected; FMIF is pulled down and FMIF's feed-back resistor is off. Enable IFC operation; FMIF is selected; AMIF is pulled down and AMIF's feedback resistor is off. Enable IFC operation; Both AMIF and FMIF are selected. Gate Time Select Bits IFMOD.1 0 0 1 1 IFMOD.0 0 1 0 1 Gate time is 2 ms. Gate time is 8 ms. Gate time is 16 ms. Gate is open Select Gate Time IFC GATE FLAG REGISTER (PLLREF.5) www.DataSheet4U.com PLLREF.7-.4 ULFG CEFG IFCFG POFG F9H at bank 0 of set 1 When IFC operation is started by setting IFMOD, the IFC gate flag (IFCFG) is cleared to “0”. After a specified gate time has elapsed, the IFCFG bit is automatically set to “1”. This lets you check whether a IFC counting operation has been completed or not. The IFC interrupt can also be used to check whether or not a IFC counting operation is complete. 19-3 INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY COUNTER S3C831B/P831B GATE TIMES When you write a value to IFMOD, the IFC gate is opened for a 1-millisecond, 4-millisecond, or 8-millisecond interval, setting with a rising clock edge. When the gate is open, the frequency at the AMIF or FMIF pin is counted by the 16-bit counter. When the gate closes, the IFC gate flag (IFCFG) is set to “1”. An interrupt is then generated and the IFC interrupt pending bit (PLLMOD.2) is set. Figure 19-2 shows gate timings with a 1-kHz internal clock. Clock (1 kHz) Gate Time 2 ms 8 ms 16 ms Counting Period www.DataSheet4U.com Gate open here IFMOD is written; IFCFG flag is cleared to "0". Counting ends; IFCFG flag is set to "1" and PLLMOD.2 is set to "1". Figure 19-2. Gate Timing (2,8, or 16 ms) 19-4 S3C831B/P831B INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY COUNTER Selecting “Gate Remains Open” If you select “gate remain open” (IFMOD.0 and IFMOD.1 = “1”), the IFC counts the input signal during the open period of the gate. The gate closes the next time a value is written to IFMOD. Clock (1 kHz) ~~ ~~ Gate Time Counting Period The gate closes when IFMOD is rewritten Gate is opened by writing IFMOD Figure 19-3. Gate Timing (When Open) When you select “gate remains open” as the gating time, you can control the opening and closing of the gate in one of two ways: — Set the gate time to a specific interval (2-ms, 8-ms, or 16-ms) by setting bits IFMOD.1 and IFMOD.0. www.DataSheet4U.com Gate Time Set IFMOD.1 = IFMOD.0 = "1" Set non-open gate time (2-, 8-, 16-ms) by bit IFMOD.1 and IFMOD.0 — Disable IFC operation by clearing bits IFMOD.3 and IFMOD.2 to “0”. This method lets the gate remain open, and stops the counting operation. Gate Time Set IFMOD.1 = IFMOD.0 = "1" Set IFMOD.3 = IFMOD.2 = "0", IFC counting operation is stopped. 19-5 INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY COUNTER S3C831B/P831B Gate Time Errors A gate time error occurs whenever the gate signals are not synchronized to the interval instruction clock. That is, the IFC does not start counter operation until a rising edge of the gate signal is detected, even though the counter start instruction (setting bits IFMOD.3 and IFMOD.2) has been executed. Therefore, there is a maximum 1-ms timing error (see Figure 19-4). After you have executed the IFC start instruction, you can check the gate state at any time. Please note, however that the IFC does not actually start its counting operation until stabilization time for the gate control signal has elapsed. Instruction Execution (IFMOD Setting) 1ms Clock (1 kHz) Actual Gate Signal (1 ms) www.DataSheet4U.com Resulting Gate Signal Gate Time Errors Actual Counting Period Figure 19-4. Gate Timing (1-ms Error) Counting Errors The IF counter counts the rising edges of the input signal in order to determine the frequency. If the input signal is High level when the gate is open, one additional pulse is counted. When the gate is close, however, counting is not affected by the input signal status. In other words, the counting error is “+1, 0”. 19-6 S3C831B/P831B INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY COUNTER IF COUNTER (IFC) OPERATION IFMOD register bits 2 and 3 are used to select the input pin and to start or stop IFC counting operation. You stop the counting operation by clearing IFMOD.2 and IFMOD.3 to “0”. The IFC retains its previous value until IFMOD register values are specified. Setting bits IFMOD.3 and IFMOD.2 starts the frequency counting operation. Counting continues as long as the gate is open. The 16-bit counter value is automatically cleared to 0000H after it overflows (at FFFFH), and continues counting from zero. The 16-bit count value (IFCNT1-IFCNT0) can be read by register addressing mode. A reset operation clears the counter to zero. IFCNT0 IFCNT1 IFCNT0.7 IFCNT1.7 IFCNT0.6 IFCNT1.6 IFCNT0.5 IFCNT1.5 IFCNT0.4 IFCNT1.4 IFCNT0.3 IFCNT1.3 IFCNT0.2 IFCNT1.2 IFCNT0.1 IFCNT1.1 IFCNT0.0 IFCNT1.0 When the specified gate open time has elapsed, the gate closes in order to complete the counter operation. At this time, the IFC interrupt pending bit (PLLMOD.2) is automatically set to “1” and an interrupt is generated. The pending bit must be cleared to “0” by software when the interrupt is serviced. The IFC gate flag (IFCFG) is set to “1” at the same time the gate is closed. Since the IFCFG flag is cleared to “0” when IFC operation start, you can check the IFCFG flag to determine when IFC operation stops (that is, when the specified gate open time has elapsed). The frequency applied to FMIF or AMIF pin is counted while the gate is open. The frequency applied to FMIF pin is divided by 2 before counting. The relationship between the count value (N) and input frequencies fAMIF and www.DataSheet4U.com f FMIF is shown below. — FMIF pin input frequency is fFMIF = N (DEC) x 2 TG when TG = gate time (2 ms, 8 ms, 16 ms) — AMIF pin input frequency is fAMIF = N (DEC) TG when TG = gate time (2 ms, 8 ms, 16 ms) Table 19-2 shows the range of frequency that you can apply to the AMIF and FMIF pins. Table 19-2. IF Counter Frequency Characteristics Pin AMIF FMIF Voltage Level 300 m VPP (min) 300 m VPP (min) Frequency Range 0.1 MHz to 1 MHz 5 MHz to 15 MHz 19-7 INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY COUNTER S3C831B/P831B INPUT PIN CONFIGURATION The AMIF and FMIF pins have built-in AC amplifiers (see Figure 19-5). The DC component of the input signal must be stripped off by the external capacitor. When the AMIF or FMIF pin is selected for the IFC function and the switch is turned on voltage of each pin increases to approximately 1/2 VDD after a sufficiently long time. If the pin voltage does not increase to approximately 1/2 VDD, the AC amplifier exceeds its operating range, possibly causing an IFC malfunction. To prevent this from occurring, you should program a sufficiently long time delay interval before starting the count operation. SW C FMIF AMIF External Frequency To Internal Counter Figure 19-5. AMIF and FMIF Pin Configuration www.DataSheet4U.com 19-8 S3C831B/P831B INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY COUNTER IFC DATA CALCULATION Selecting the FMIF pin for IFC Input First, divide the signal at the FMIF pin by 2, and then apply this value to the IF counter. This means that the IF counter value is equal to one-half of the input signal frequency. FMIF input frequency (fFMIF): 10.7 MHz Gate time (TG): 8 ms IFC counter value (N): N = (fFMIF/2) × TG = 10.7 × 106 /2 × 8 × 10-3 = 42800 = A730H Bin Dec IFCNT 1 0 A IFCNT1 1 0 0 1 7 1 1 0 0 3 IFCNT0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 Selecting the AMIF Pin for IFC Input The signal at AMIF pin is directly input to the IF counter. www.DataSheet4U.com AMIF input frequency (fAMIF): 450 kHz Gate time (TG): 8 ms IFC counter value (N): N = (fAMIF) × TG = 450 × 103 × 8 × 10-3 = 3600 = E10H Bin Dec IFCNT 0 0 0 IFCNT1 0 0 1 1 E 1 0 0 0 1 IFCNT0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 19-9 INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY COUNTER S3C831B/P831B NOTES www.DataSheet4U.com 19-10 S3C831B/P831B ELECTRICAL DATA 20 OVERVIEW ELECTRICAL DATA In this chapter, S3C831B electrical characteristics are presented in tables and graphs. The information is arranged in the following order: — Absolute maximum ratings — D.C. electrical characteristics — A.C. electrical characteristics — Input/output capacitance — Data retention supply voltage in stop mode — A/D converter electrical characteristics — PLL electrical characteristics — Low voltage reset electrical characteristics www.DataSheet4U.com — Serial I/O timing characteristics — Oscillation characteristics — Oscillation stabilization time 20-1 ELECTRICAL DATA S3C831B/P831B Table 20-1. Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA= 25 °C) Parameter Supply voltage Input voltage Output voltage Output current high Symbol VDD VI VO IOH IOL TA TSTG Conditions – Ports 0–8 – One I/O pin active All I/O pins active Output current low One I/O pin active Total pin current for port Operating temperature Storage temperature Rating – 0.3 to +6.5 – 0.3 to VDD + 0.3 – 0.3 to VDD + 0.3 – 15 – 60 + 30 + 100 – 25 to + 85 – 65 to + 150 °C Unit V mA Table 20-2. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (TA = –25 °C to + 85 °C, VDD = 2.2 V to 5.5 V) Parameter Operating www.DataSheet4U.com Symbol VDD Conditions fx = 0.4–4.5 MHz fx = 4.5–9 MHz PLL, IFC operating IFMOD.4 = 0 IFMOD.4 = 1 Min. 2.2 4.0 4.5 2.5 0.7 VDD 0.8 VDD 0.8 VDD VDD–0.1 – Typ. – – – – – Max. 5.5 5.5 5.5 3.5 VDD VDD VDD VDD 0.3 VDD Unit V Voltage Input High Voltage VIH1 VIH2 VIH3 VIH4 P1.4–P1.7, Ports 3, 4, 5 P1.0–P1.3, Ports 0, 2, 6, 7, 8 RESET, CE XIN, XOUT P1.4–P1.7, Ports 3, 4, 5 P1.0–P1.3, Ports 0, 2, 6, 7, 8 RESET, CE XIN, XOUT VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V EO0, EO1; IOH = –1 mA VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V Other output ports; IOH = –1 mA VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V EO0, EO1; IOL = 1 mA VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V Other output ports; IOL = 10 mA V Input Low Voltage VIL1 VIL2 VIL3 VIL4 V – 0.2 VDD 0.2 VDD 0.1 Output High Voltage VOH1 VOH2 VDD – 2.0 VDD – 1.0 – – – – VDD VDD 2.0 2.0 V Output Low Voltage VOL1 VOL2 V 20-2 S3C831B/P831B ELECTRICAL DATA Table 20-2. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (Continued) (TA = -25 °C to + 85 °C, VDD = 2.2 V to 5.5 V) Parameter Input High Leakage Current Symbol ILIH1 Conditions VIN = VDD All input pins except XIN, XOUT VIN = VDD, XIN, XOUT VIN = 0 V All input pins except RESET, XIN, XOUT VIN = 0 V, XIN, XOUT VOUT = VDD All output pins VOUT = 0 V All output pins VIN = 0 V; Port 0–8 TA = 25°C RL2 www.DataSheet4U.com Min. – Typ. – Max. 3 Unit uA ILIH2 Input Low Leakage Current ILIL1 20 – – -3 ILIL2 Output High Leakage Current Output Low Leakage Current Pull-Up Resistor ILOH ILOL RL1 -20 – – – – 47 95 250 450 30 3 -3 100 200 400 800 45 kΩ kΩ VDD = 5 V VDD = 3 V VDD = 5 V VDD = 3 V 25 50 150 200 15 VIN = 0 V RESET TA = 25°C Pull-Down Resistor RD VIN = VDD, VDD = 5 V VCOFM, VCOAM, AMIF and FMIF, TA = 25°C VDD = 5 V, TA = 25 °C XIN = VDD, XOUT = 0 V TA = 25 °C –15 µA per common pin Oscillator Feed Back Resistors LCD Voltage Dividing Resistor |VLCD – COMi| Voltage Drop (I = 0–3) |VLCD – SEGx| Voltage Drop (x = 0–39) Middle Output Voltage ROSC RLCD VDC 300 600 1500 kΩ kΩ mV 70 – 100 45 150 120 VDS –15 µA per common pin – 45 120 mV VLC0 VLC1 VLC2 VDD = 2.7 V to 5.5 V 0.6VDD– 0.2 0.4VDD– 0.2 0.2VDD– 0.2 0.6VDD 0.4VDD 0.2VDD 0.6VDD + 0.2 0.4VDD + 0.2 0.2VDD + 0.2 V 20-3 ELECTRICAL DATA S3C831B/P831B Table 20-2. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (Concluded) (TA = -25 °C to + 85 °C, VDD = 2.2 V to 5.5 V) Parameter Supply current (1) Symbol IDD1 Conditions Run mode: 4.5 MHz crystal oscillator CE = VDD, VDD = 5 V ± 10 % Crystal Oscillator C1 = C2 = 22pF VDD = 3 V ± 10 % IDD2 Run mode: CE = 0 V, VDD = 5 V ± 10 % Crystal Oscillator C1 = C2 = 22pF VDD = 3 V ± 10 % IDD3 Idle mode: CE = 0 V, VDD = 5 V ± 10 % Crystal Oscillator C1 = C2 = 22pF VDD = 3 V ± 10 % www.DataSheet4U.com Min. 9.0 MHz 4.5 MHz – Typ. 12.0 6.5 Max. 25.0 15.0 Unit mA 4.5 MHz 9.0 MHz 4.5 MHz 4.5 MHz 9.0 MHz 4.5 MHz 4.5 MHz 4.0 5.0 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 9.0 12.0 5.5 3.5 4.0 2.0 1.2 3 2 µA IDD4 (2) Stop mode (in LVR disable): CE = 0 V, TA = 25 °C, VDD = 5 V ± 10 % VDD = 3 V ± 10 % NOTES: 1. Supply current does not include current drawn through internal pull-up resistors, PWM, or external output current loads. 2. IDD4 is current when the main clock oscillation stops. 3. Every values in this table is measured when bits 4–3 of the system clock control register (CLKCON.4–.3) is set to 11B. 20-4 S3C831B/P831B ELECTRICAL DATA Table 20-3. A.C. Electrical Characteristics (TA = -25 °C to +85 °C, VDD = 2.2 V to 5.5 V) Parameter Interrupt input high, low width (P1.0–P1.7) RESET input low width Symbol tINTH, tINTL tRSL Conditions P1.0–P1.7, VDD = 5 V Min 10 Typ – Max Unit µs VDD = 5 V 10 – – us tINTL tINTH VIH VIL www.DataSheet4U.com Figure 20-1. Input Timing for External Interrupts (Ports 1) tRSL RESET 0.2 V DD Figure 20-2. Input Timing for RESET RESET 20-5 ELECTRICAL DATA S3C831B/P831B Table 20-4. Input/Output Capacitance (TA = -25 °C to +85 °C, VDD = 0 V ) Parameter Input capacitance Output capacitance I/O capacitance Symbol CIN COUT CIO Conditions f = 1 MHz; unmeasured pins are returned to VSS Min – Typ – Max 10 Unit pF Table 20-5. Data Retention Supply Voltage in Stop Mode (TA = -25 °C to + 85 °C) Parameter Data retention supply voltage Data retention supply current Symbol VDDDR IDDDR VDDDR = 2.2 V (TA = 25 °C) Stop mode (in LVR disable) Conditions Min 2.2 – Typ – – Max 5.5 1 Unit V uA www.DataSheet4U.com RESET Occurs Stop Mode Data Retention Mode Oscillation Stabilization Time Normal Operating Mode ~ ~ ~ ~ VDD VDDDR Execution of STOP Instrction RESET 0.2 V DD NOTE: tWAIT is the same as 4096 x 16 x 1/fxx tWAIT Figure 20-3. Stop Mode Release Timing Initiated by RESET RESET 20-6 S3C831B/P831B ELECTRICAL DATA Oscillation Stabilization Time Stop Mode Data Retention Mode Idle Mode ~ ~ ~ ~ VDD VDDDR Execution of STOP Instruction Interrupt V IL tWAIT Normal Operating Mode NOTE: tWAIT is the same as 16 x 1/BT clock Figure 20-4. Stop Mode Release Timing Initiated by Interrupts Table 20-6. A/D Converter Electrical Characteristics www.DataSheet4U.com (TA = -25 °C to +85 °C, VDD = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Parameter A/D converting resolution Absolute accuracy A/D conversion time (NOTE) Analog input voltage Analog input impedance Symbol – – tCON VIAN RAN VDD = 5 V Conditions – VDD = 5.12 V Conversion clock = fxx – Min – – 50/fxx VSS 2 – 1000 Typ 8 – Max – ±2 – VDD – Unit bits LSB µs V MΩ NOTE: A/D Converter needs at least 25µs for conversion time. 20-7 ELECTRICAL DATA S3C831B/P831B Table 20-7. PLL Electrical Characteristics (TA = –25 °C to +85 °C, VDD = 2.5 V to 3.5 V, 4.5 V to 5.5 V) Parameter VCOFM, VCOAM, FMIF and AMIF input voltage (peak to peak) Frequency Symbol VIN Conditions Sine wave input Min 0.3 Typ – Max VDD Unit V fVCOAM fVCOFM f AMIF f FMIF VCOAM mode, sine wave input; VIN = 0.3VP-P VCOFM mode, sine wave input; VIN = 0.3VP-P AMIF mode, sine wave input; VIN = 0.3VP-P FMIF mode, sine wave input; VIN = 0.3VP-P 0.5 30 0.1 5 – 30 150 1.0 15 MHz Table 20-8. Low Voltage Reset Electrical Characteristics (TA = –25 °C to +85 °C) Parameter www.DataSheet4U.com Symbol VDET Conditions LVRSEL = VSS LVRSEL = VDD Min 3.2 2.2 – Typ 3.7 2.4 10 Max 4.2 2.7 25 Unit V V µA Detect voltage range LVR operating current ILVR – 20-8 S3C831B/P831B ELECTRICAL DATA Table 20-9. Synchronous SIO Electrical Characteristics (TA = –25 °C to +85 °C, VDD = 2.2 V to 5.5 V) Parameter SCK0/SCK1 cycle time Symbol tCKY tKH, tKL Conditions External SCK0/SCK1 source Internal SCK0/SCK1 source SCK0/SCK1 high, low width SI setup time to SCK0/SCK1 high SI hold time to SCK0/SCK1 high Output delay for SCK0/SCK1 to SO tKSO tKSI tSIK External SCK0/SCK1 source Internal SCK0/SCK1 source External SCK0/SCK1 source Internal SCK0/SCK1 source External SCK0/SCK1 source Internal SCK0/SCK1 source External SCK0/SCK1 source Internal SCK0/SCK1 source Min 1000 1000 500 tKCY/2–50 250 250 400 400 – – 300 250 – – – – – – Typ – Max – Unit ns tCKY www.DataSheet4U.com tKL tKH SCK0/SCK1 0.7 VDD 0.3 VDD tSIK tKSI 0.7 VDD Input Data 0.3 VDD SI0/SI1 tKSO SO0/SO1 Output Data Figure 20-5. Serial Data Transfer Timing 20-9 ELECTRICAL DATA S3C831B/P831B Table 20-10. Main Oscillator Characteristics (fx) (TA = –25 °C to +85 °C, VDD = 2.2 V to 5.5 V) Oscillator Crystal Clock Circuit XIN XOUT Parameter Crystal oscillation frequency(1) Stablilization time(2) Test Condition VDD = 2.2V – 5.5V VDD = 4.0V – 5.5V Stabilization occurs when VDD is equal to the minimum oscillator voltage range. VDD = 2.2V – 5.5V VDD = 4.0V – 5.5V – Min 0.4 0.4 – Typ – – – Max 4.5 9 40 Unit MHz ms C1 C2 Ceramic XIN XOUT Crystal oscillation frequency(1) Stablilization time(2) 0.4 0.4 – 0.4 0.4 110 55 – – – – – – – 4.5 9 10 4.5 9 1250 1250 MHz C1 C2 ms MHz External Clock XIN X OUT XIN input frequency (1) VDD = 2.2V – 5.5V VDD = 4.0V – 5.5V XIN input high and low VDD = 2.2V – 5.5V ns www.DataSheet4U.com level width (tXH, tXL) VDD = 4.0V – 5.5V NOTES: 1. Oscillation frequency and XIN input frequency data are for oscillator characteristics only. 2. Stabilization time is the interval required for oscillating stabilization after a power-on occurs, or when stop mode is terminated. 20-10 S3C831B/P831B ELECTRICAL DATA 1/fx tXL XIN VDD-0.1V 0.1V tXH Figure 20-6. Clock Timing Measurement at XIN Instruction Clock 2.25 MHZ Main Oscillator Frequency 9 MHZ www.DataSheet4U.com 1.125 MHZ 4.5 MHZ 100 kHz 1 2 2.2V Supply Voltage (V) CPU Clock = 1/4n x oscillator frequency (n = 1,2,8,16) 3 4 5 6 7 400 kHz When PLL/IFC operation, operating voltage range is 2.5 V to 3.5 V or 4.5 V to 5.5 V. Figure 20-7. Operating Voltage Range 20-11 ELECTRICAL DATA S3C831B/P831B NOTES www.DataSheet4U.com 20-12 S3C831B/P831B MECHANICAL DATA 21 OVERVIEW MECHANICAL DATA The S3C831B microcontroller is currently available in 100-pin-QFP or 100-pin-TQFP package. 23.90 ± 0.30 20.00 ± 0.20 0-8 + 0.10 0.15 - 0.05 www.DataSheet4U.com 17.90 ± 0.30 14.00 ± 0.20 100-QFP-1420C 0.10 MAX (0.83) #100 #1 0.65 0.30 + 0.10 - 0.05 0.15 MAX 0.05 MIN (0.58) 2.65 ± 0.10 3.00 MAX 0.10 MAX 0.80 ± 0.20 NOTE: Dimensions are in millimeters. Figure 21-1. Package Dimensions (100-QFP-1420C) 0.80 ± 0.20 21-1 MECHANICAL DATA S3C831B/P831B 16.00 ± 0.20 14.00 0-7 0.127 + 0.073 - 0.037 16.00 ± 0.20 14.00 100-TQFP-1414 0.08 MAX #100 www.DataSheet4U.com #1 0.50 0.20 + 0.07 - 0.03 0.08 M A X 0.05-0.15 (1.00) 1.00 ± 0.05 1.20 MAX NOTE: Dimensions are in millimeters. Figure 21-2. Package Dimensions (100-TQFP-1414) 21-2 0.45-0.75 S3C831B/P831B S3P831B OTP 22 OVERVIEW S3P831B OTP The S3P831B single-chip CMOS microcontroller is the OTP (One Time Programmable) version of the S3C831B microcontroller. It has an on-chip OTP ROM instead of a masked ROM. The EPROM is accessed by serial data format. The S3P831B is fully compatible with the S3C831B, both in function in D.C. electrical characteristics and in pin configuration. Because of its simple programming requirements, the S3P831B is ideal as an evaluation chip for the S3C831B. www.DataSheet4U.com 22-1 S3P831B OTP S3C831B/P831B FMIF VDDPLL0 EO0 EO1 CE P0.0 P0.1/T0CLK P0.2/T0CAP P0.3/T0OUT/T0PWM P0.4/T1CLK P0.5/T1OUT P0.6/T2CLK P0.7/T2OUT P1.0/INT0 P1.1/INT1 P1.2/INT2 P1.3/INT3 P1.4/INT4 P1.5/INT5 P1.6/INT6 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 www.DataSheet4U.com P1.7/INT7 P2.0/AD0 P2.1/AD1 P2.2/AD2 P2.3/AD3 P2.4/AD4 P2.5/AD5 P2.6/AD6 P2.7/AD7 AVDD P3.0/BUZ P3.1/SCK0 SDAT/P3.2/SO0 SCLK/P3.3/SI0 VDD/VDD VSS/VSS XOUT XIN VPP/TEST1 TEST2 P3.4/SCK1 RESET/RESET P3.5/SO1 P3.6/SI1 P3.7 P4.0/SEG39 P4.1/SEG38 P4.2/SEG37 P4.3/SEG36 P4.4/SEG35 S3P831B 100-QFP-1420C 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 AMIF VSSPLL VCOAM VCOFM VDDPLL1 LVREN LVRSEL BIAS VLC0 VLC1 VLC2 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 SEG0/P8.7 SEG1/P8.6 SEG2/P8.5 SEG3/P8.4 SEG4/P8.3 SEG5/P8.2 SEG6/P8.1 SEG7/P8.0 SEG8/P7.7 SEG9/P7.6 SEG10/P7.5 SEG11/P7.4 SEG12/P7.3 SEG13/P7.2 SEG14/P7.1 Figure 22-1. S3P831B Pin Assignments (100-Pin QFP Package) 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 SEG15/P7.0 SEG16/P6.7 SEG17/P6.6 SEG18/P6.5 SEG19/P6.4 SEG20/P6.3 SEG21/P6.2 SEG22/P6.1 SEG23/P6.0 SEG24/P5.7 SEG25/P5.6 SEG26/P5.5 SEG27/P5.4 SEG28/P5.3 SEG29/P5.2 SEG30/P5.1 SEG31/P5.0 SEG32/P4.7 SEG33/P4.6 SEG34/P4.5 22-2 S3C831B/P831B S3P831B OTP VCOAM VSSPLL AMIF FMIF VDDPLL0 EO0 EO1 CE P0.0 P0.1/T0CLK P0.2/T0CAP P0.3/T0OUT/T0PWM P0.4/T1CLK P0.5/T1OUT P0.6/T2CLK P0.7/T2OUT P1.0/INT0 P1.1/INT1 P1.2/INT2 P1.3/INT3 P1.4/INT4 P1.5/INT5 P1.6/INT6 P1.7/INT7 P2.0/AD0 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 www.DataSheet4U.com P2.1/AD1 P2.2/AD2 P2.3/AD3 P2.4/AD4 P2.5/AD5 P2.6/AD6 P2.7/AD7 AVDD P3.0/BUZ P3.1/SCK0 SDAT/P3.2/SO0 SCLK/P3.3/SI0 VDD/VDD VSS/VSS XOUT XIN VPP/TEST1 TEST2 P3.4/SCK1 RESET/RESET P3.5/SO1 P3.6/SI1 P3.7 P4.0/SEG39 P4.1/SEG38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 S3P831B 100-TQFP-1414 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 VCOFM VDDPLL1 LVREN LVRSEL BIAS VLC0 VLC1 VLC2 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 SEG0/P8.7 SEG1/P8.6 SEG2/P8.5 SEG3/P8.4 SEG4/P8.3 SEG5/P8.2 SEG6/P8.1 SEG7/P8.0 SEG8/P7.7 SEG9/P7.6 SEG10/P7.5 SEG11/P7.4 SEG12/P7.3 Figure 22-2. S3P831B Pin Assignments (100-Pin TQFP Package) 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 SEG13/P7.2 SEG14/P7.1 SEG15/P7.0 SEG16/P6.7 SEG17/P6.6 SEG18/P6.5 SEG19/P6.4 SEG20/P6.3 SEG21/P6.2 SEG22/P6.1 SEG23/P6.0 SEG24/P5.7 SEG25/P5.6 SEG26/P5.5 SEG27/P5.4 SEG28/P5.3 SEG29/P5.2 SEG30/P5.1 SEG31/P5.0 SEG32/P4.7 SEG33/P4.6 SEG34/P4.5 SEG35/P4.4 SEG36/P4.3 SEG37/P4.2 22-3 S3P831B OTP S3C831B/P831B Table 22-1. Descriptions of Pins Used to Read/Write the EPROM Main Chip Pin Name P3.2/SO0 Pin Name SDAT Pin No. 13(11) During Programming I/O I/O Function Serial data pin. Output port when reading and input port when writing. Can be assigned as a Input/push-pull output port. Serial clock pin. Input only pin. Power supply pin for EPROM cell writing (indicates that OTP enters into the writing mode). When 12.5 V is applied, OTP is in writing mode and when 5 V is applied, OTP is in reading mode. (Option) Chip Initialization Logic power supply pin. VDD should be tied to +5 V during programming. P3.3/SI0 TEST1 SCLK VPP 14(12) 19(17) I I RESET VDD/VSS RESET VDD/VSS 22(20) 15/16(13/14) I – NOTE: Parentheses indicate pin number for 100-TQFP-1414 package. Table 22-2. Comparison of S3P831B and S3C831B Features Characteristic Program Memory www.DataSheet4U.com S3P831B 64-Kbyte EPROM 2.2 V to 5.5 V VDD = 5 V, VPP (TEST1) = 12.5 V 100 QFP, 100 TQFP User Program 1 time S3C831B 64-Kbyte mask ROM 2.2 V to 5.5 V Operating Voltage (VDD) OTP Programming Mode Pin Configuration EPROM Programmability 100 QFP, 100 TQFP Programmed at the factory OPERATING MODE CHARACTERISTICS When 12.5 V is supplied to the VPP (TEST1) pin of the S3P831B, the EPROM programming mode is entered. The operating mode (read, write, or read protection) is selected according to the input signals to the pins listed in Table 22-3 below. Table 22-3. Operating Mode Selection Criteria VDD 5V VPP (TEST1) 5V 12.5 V 12.5 V 12.5 V REG/MEM 0 0 0 1 Address(A15–A0) 0000H 0000H 0000H 0E3FH R/W 1 0 1 0 Mode EPROM read EPROM program EPROM verify EPROM read protection NOTE: "0" means Low level; "1" means High level. 22-4 S3C831B/P831B S3P831B OTP Instruction Clock 2.25 MHZ Main Oscillator Frequency 9 MHZ 1.125 MHZ 4.5 MHZ 100 kHz 1 2 2.2V Supply Voltage (V) CPU Clock = 1/4n x oscillator frequency (n = 1,2,8,16) 3 4 5 6 7 400 kHz When PLL/IFC operation, operating voltage range is 2.5 V to 3.5 V or 4.5 V to 5.5 V. www.DataSheet4U.com Figure 22-3. Operating Voltage Range 22-5 S3P831B OTP S3C831B/P831B NOTES www.DataSheet4U.com 22-6 S3C831B/P831B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS 23 OVERVIEW SHINE DEVELOPMENT TOOLS Samsung provides a powerful and easy-to-use development support system in turnkey form. The development support system is configured with a host system, debugging tools, and support software. For the host system, any standard computer that operates with MS-DOS as its operating system can be used. One type of debugging tool including hardware and software is provided: the sophisticated and powerful in-circuit emulator, SMDS2+, for S3C7, S3C9, S3C8 families of microcontrollers. The SMDS2+ is a new and improved version of SMDS2. Samsung also offers support software that includes debugger, assembler, and a program for setting options. Samsung Host Interface for In-Circuit Emulator, SHINE, is a multi-window based debugger for SMDS2+. SHINE provides pull-down and pop-up menus, mouse support, function/hot keys, and context-sensitive hyper-linked help. It has an advanced, multiple-windowed user interface that emphasizes ease of use. Each window can be sized, moved, scrolled, highlighted, added, or removed completely. www.DataSheet4U.com SAMA ASSEMBLER The Samsung Arrangeable Microcontroller (SAM) Assembler, SAMA, is a universal assembler, and generates object code in standard hexadecimal format. Assembled program code includes the object code that is used for ROM data and required SMDS program control data. To assemble programs, SAMA requires a source file and an auxiliary definition (DEF) file with device specific information. SASM88 The SASM88 is a relocatable assembler for Samsung's S3C8-series microcontrollers. The SASM88 takes a source file containing assembly language statements and translates into a corresponding source code, object code and comments. The SASM88 supports macros and conditional assembly. It runs on the MS-DOS operating system. It produces the relocatable object code only, so the user should link object file. Object files can be linked with other object files and loaded into memory. HEX2ROM HEX2ROM file generates ROM code from HEX file which has been produced by assembler. ROM code must be needed to fabricate a microcontroller which has a mask ROM. When generating the ROM code (.OBJ file) by HEX2ROM, the value "FF" is filled into the unused ROM area up to the maximum ROM size of the target device automatically. TARGET BOARDS Target boards are available for all S3C8-series microcontrollers. All required target system cables and adapters are included with the device-specific target board. 23-1 DEVELOPMENT TOOLS S3C831B/P831B IBM-PC AT or Compatible RS-232C SMDS2+ PROM/OTP Writer Unit Target Application System RAM Break/Display Unit Probe Adapter Bus Trace/Timer Unit SAM8 Base Unit POD TB831B Target Board Eva Chip Power Supply Unit www.DataSheet4U.com Figure 23-1. SMDS Product Configuration (SMDS2+) 23-2 S3C831B/P831B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS TB831B TARGET BOARD The TB831B target board is used for the S3C831B/P831B microcontroller. It is supported with the SMDS2+, Smart Kit and OPENice. TB831B VLC0 VLC1 To User_V CC Off On 74NC11 u3 REV.0 2002, 12. 24 GND Dip1 VLC2 RESET 25 X-tal Xin MDS JP6 Y1 X-tal Idle Stop + + J101 1 www.DataSheet4U.com J102 2 10 51 59 69 79 89 99 50-Pin Connector 52 60 70 80 90 100 TB831B 160-QFP 9 19 29 50-Pin Connector 20 30 40 50 1 39 SMDS2 JP4 SMDS2+ JP5 LV LVRSEL HV 49 JP2 JP1 ON CE OFF ON LVRSN OFF SM1344A Figure 23-2. TB831B Target Board Configuration GND VCC 23-3 DEVELOPMENT TOOLS S3C831B/P831B Table 23-1. Power Selection Settings for TB831B "To User_Vcc" Settings To User_VCC Off On TB831B VCC VSS VCC SMDS2/SMDS2+ Target System Operating Mode Comments The SMDS2/SMDS2+ supplies VCC to the target board (evaluation chip) and the target system. To User_VCC Off On TB831B External VCC VSS VCC SMDS2+ Target System The SMDS2/SMDS2+ supplies VCC only to the target board (evaluation chip). The target system must have its own power supply. NOTE: The following symbol in the "To User_Vcc" Setting column indicates the electrical short (off) configuration: www.DataSheet4U.com 23-4 S3C831B/P831B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS SMDS2+ SELECTION (SAM8) In order to write data into program memory that is available in SMDS2+, the target board should be selected to be for SMDS2+ through a switch as follows. Otherwise, the program memory writing function is not available. Table 23-2. The SMDS2+ Tool Selection Setting "SW1" Setting SMDS2 SMDS2+ Operating Mode R/W SMDS2+ R/W Target System IDLE LED The Yellow LED is ON when the evaluation chip (S3E8310) is in idle mode. STOP LED The Red LED is ON when the evaluation chip (S3E8310) is in stop mode. www.DataSheet4U.com 23-5 DEVELOPMENT TOOLS S3C831B/P831B (Preliminary Spec) J101 P1.7 P2.1 P2.3 P2.5 P2.7 P3.0 P3.2 User_VCC XOUT GND P3.4 P3.5 P3.7 P4.1 P4.3 P4.5 P4.7 P5.1 P5.3 P5.5 P5.7 P6.1 P6.3 P6.5 P6.7 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 P2.0 P2.2 P2.4 P2.6 NC P3.1 P3.3 GND XIN GND DEMO_RSTB P3.6 P4.0 P4.2 P4.4 P4.6 P5.0 P5.2 P5.4 P5.6 P6.0 P6.2 P6.4 P6.5 P7.0 P7.1 P7.3 P7.5 P7.7 P8.1 P8.3 P8.5 P8.7 COM2 COM0 VLC1 BIAS LVR_EN VCOFM GND FMIF EO0 CE P0.1 P0.2 P0.5 P0.7 P1.1 P1.3 P1.5 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 J102 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 P7.2 P7.4 P7.6 P8.0 P8.2 P8.4 P8.6 COM3 COM1 VLC2 VLC0 LVRSEL VDD VCOAM AMIF NC EO1 P0.0 P0.2 P0.4 P0.6 P1.0 P1.2 P1.4 P1.6 50-Pin DIP Connector 50-Pin DIP Connector www.DataSheet4U.com Figure 23-3. 50-Pin Connectors (J101, J102) for TB831B Target Board J101 50-Pin DIP Connector 1 2 J102 51 52 Part Name: (AS50D-A) Order Cods: SM6305 Target System J102 51 52 J101 50-Pin DIP Connector 1 2 49 50 99 100 99 100 49 50 Figure 23-4. S3C831B/P831B Probe Adapter Cables for 100-QFP Package 23-6